Search Results for “feed” – Garage Gym Reviews https://www.garagegymreviews.com Trusted Home Gym Equipment Reviews Thu, 26 Feb 2026 20:30:06 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.7.2 https://www.garagegymreviews.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/02/cropped-Favicon-Wht-on-Blck-32x32.png Search Results for “feed” – Garage Gym Reviews https://www.garagegymreviews.com 32 32 Rogue Feed Sack - 50-lb https://www.garagegymreviews.com/equipment/rogue-feed-sack-50-lb Tue, 10 Feb 2026 10:54:55 +0000 https://www.garagegymreviews.com/equipment/rogue-feed-sack-50-lb  » Read more about: Rogue Feed Sack - 50-lb  »]]>  » Read more about: Rogue Feed Sack - 50-lb  »]]> Rogue Feed Sack - 75-lb https://www.garagegymreviews.com/equipment/rogue-feed-sack-75-lb Tue, 10 Feb 2026 10:54:47 +0000 https://www.garagegymreviews.com/equipment/rogue-feed-sack-75-lb  » Read more about: Rogue Feed Sack - 75-lb  »]]>  » Read more about: Rogue Feed Sack - 75-lb  »]]> Rogue Feed Sack https://www.garagegymreviews.com/equipment/rogue-feed-sack Wed, 04 Feb 2026 20:55:06 +0000 https://www.garagegymreviews.com/equipment/rogue-feed-sack  » Read more about: Rogue Feed Sack  »]]>  » Read more about: Rogue Feed Sack  »]]> Best Creatine Gummies (2026): Your Favorite Muscle-Building Powder In Candy Form https://www.garagegymreviews.com/best-creatine-gummies Thu, 05 Feb 2026 22:27:00 +0000 https://www.garagegymreviews.com/?p=159642 Creatine has a well-documented history of helping people increase strength, build muscle, reduce muscle recovery time post-workout, and enhance overall exercise performance. Typically, this dietary supplement comes in the form of creatine powder or capsules. But what if you could get your daily dose of creatine in a tastier fashion?

It’s true, creatine now comes in a next-level form: Gummy candy. 

From gummy bears to chewable tablets, our expert testing team of personal trainers, elite athletes, and nutrition coaches bought, tested, and analyzed the best creatine gummies to help you select the most enjoyable supplements possible. We’re confident in our recommendations, as our shopping guides helped more than 7,000 consumers make creatine purchases in 2025. 

We’ve tested over 60 creatine supplements and utilized our creatine testing methodology to rate each creatine gummy from 1 to 5 in several categories, including:

  • Formulation: For a 3 out of 5, we want to see at least 3 grams of creatine per serving and as few additional ingredients as possible. In a gummy, that means no excessive sugars or filler ingredients. 
  • Taste: This can be subjective, but in general, a 3-point score reflects a gummy that tastes, well, like a gummy. There are no surprises, good or bad. An outstanding taste warrants a 5-point score from our testers.
  • Texture: Similar to taste, a 3-point score for texture indicates that the gummy feels like a gummy when you eat it. Grainy or powdery textures earn lower ratings, while something that is indistinguishable from a gummy bear may earn a perfect 5 out of 5. 
  • Third-Party Testing: We require transparency from brands to award high scores in this category. If a product is certified by a major organization like the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) or Banned Substance Control Group (BSCG), it earns a 5 out of 5. If there is no certification, but the label is clear and manufacturing is transparent, it earns a score of 3 out of 5.

In addition to extensive consumption of creatine gummies (rough life, right?), we also spoke with multiple experts to get the lowdown on the benefits of creatine gummies, how they compare to the best creatine powders, and what to look for when shopping. We also talked with various experts, including registered dietitians Destini Moody and Perry Nix, to inform our choices.

Medical disclaimer: This article is intended for educational and informational purposes only. It is not intended as a substitute for medical advice. For health advice, contact a licensed healthcare provider.

Best Creatine Gummies in 2026

Current Top Deals

Now is a great time to upgrade your creatine, with major sales from top supplement brands. Browse the deals below to find one that suits your goals and budget.

Latest Updates

In February 2026, we reviewed our list of the best creatine gummies and made a few changes based on our latest testing. Create Creatine Gummies still earn our top recommendation, but we’ve meticulously revamped each mini-review to provide our readers with the best details and ratings to keep them as informed as possible on the category’s best offerings.

Compare Side by Side

Create Creatine Gummies Legion Creatine Gummies Jacked Factory Creatine Gummies Swoly Creatine Gummies Bounce Nutrition Creatine Gummies Organifi Creatine Chews Animal Creatine Chews Bear Balanced Creatine Gummies
Rating
4.1
4.6
4.2
4.25
3.9
4.05
4
3.74
Price Per Serving $2.00 $1.33 $1.00 $1.27 $2.29 $1.43 $1.08 $1.60
Grams Per Serving 4.5 g 5 g 5 g 4 g 6 g 3 g 5 g 3 g
Third-party Tested?
Type Creatine Monohydrate Creatine Monohydrate Creatine Monohydrate Creatine Monohydrate Creatine Monohydrate Creatine Monohydrate Creatine Monohydrate Creatine Monohydrate
Flavors Blue Raspberry, Orange, Watermelon Sour Green Apple, Lemon Drop, Sour Blue Raspberry, Sour Watermelon Blue Raspberry, Lemon, Watermelon Strawberry Strawberry Kiwi, Watermelon, Blue Razz, Peach Rings, Cherry Lime, Berry Snow Cone Strawberry Fruit Punch, Grape, Green Apple Blueberry

Best Creatine Gummies Overall: Create Creatine Gummies

Clinically Backed Dose With Great Taste
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.1
Create Creatine Gummies
4.5 grams per serving
Multiple flavors
Gummy form
Subscribe and save 20%
Third-party tested
No artificial dyes or fillers
Up to 53% off sitewide See Details
Product Type
Creatine gummy
Key ingredients
Creatine monohydrate
Price Per Serving
$2
Third-Party Testing
NSF
Gummy lovers
If you’d rather chew than drink your creatine, these are for you
Athletes
Third-party testing means it’s safe for those who may be drug-tested
Flavor hounds
Our testers love the taste and options
Pros
High marks on taste and flavors
4.5 grams of creatine per serving
Third-party tested
Subscribe and save
Cons
Expensive
Price Per Serving
$2
Flavors
Sour Green Apple, Sour Cherry, Blue Raspberry, Watermelon, Orange
Total Servings
30
Key ingredients
Creatine monohydrate, tapioca syrup, sugar

Create creatine gummies provide 4.5 grams of creatine monohydrate per 3-gummy serving. Our testers liked the taste and texture, and these would be a great option for those who’d prefer not to drink their creatine.

At a Glance 

  • Science-backed dose
  • Third-party tested
  • No artificial dyes or fillers
  • Subscribe-and-save available

Create Creatine Gummies easily earned our top recommendation due to their clinically dosed, easy-to-read formulation and incredible taste. They use creatine monohydrate and contain 4.5 grams of creatine in a serving size of three gummies. The chewable supps are also vegan, non-GMO, and gluten-free, earning a 4 out of 5 for formulation. Each serving contains 60 calories, 8 grams of carbohydrates, and 5 grams of sugar (2 grams of added sugar).

I love that Create gummies are third-party tested for contaminants and banned substances, as well as manufactured in an FDA-approved facility. Former GGR product tester and editorial team member Kate Meier tells me, “These are a super fun treat!”

Taste: 5/5

Create Creatine Gummies On Countertop
Our tester, Kate, thoroughly enjoyed these orange-flavored gummies and rates them highly in the flavor department. 

Texture: 5/5

Image Of Create Creatine Gummies In Hand
The texture is ideal for a gummy—not grainy or overly chewy.

Third-Party Testing: 5/5

Woman Holding Create Creatine Gummies
Create gummies are NSF Certified for Sport, which is the gold standard for supplement testing. 

Why We Like Create Creatine Gummies

We love that these contain 1.5 grams of creatine per gummy—more than many, which often top out at 1 gram per gummy—so you only need three gummies to reach the high end of the clinically validated dose of 3 to 5 grams. Create uses Creapure, which is a trusted creatine monohydrate form that’s widely used across top supplements.

Other ingredients include tapioca syrup, sugar, water, pectin, malic acid, natural flavors, and natural color, which are all things I’d expect to find in gummy candy for taste and texture. 

Kate says, “They definitely taste like an orange gummy; not quite as sweet as candy, but pretty darn close—really pleasant. I love a gummy. I wish every supplement came in gummy form.” She rates the taste at a perfect 5 out of 5. Kate also experienced no unwanted effects post-consumption, warranting Create gummies another 5-out-of-5 rating for side effects.

If you’re hesitant about trying creatine gummies, Create can be a good option to try because they offer full refunds if you’re not satisfied with your purchase. Yes, they’ll even refund you if the product is opened. 

RELATED: How Long Does Creatine Stay in Your System?

The positive effect is that I’m 5 million times more likely to take a gummy than I am to take a powder.

Kate Meier, CPT, USAW-L1

Alternatives

While the formula mostly consists of things that are necessary for a gummy, they do contain 2 grams of added sugars. This is far from the most we’ve seen, sugar-wise, but it’s worth knowing for those watching their intake.  

At $60 for 30 servings, these are on the expensive side, as well (roughly $2 per serving). However, Create does offer a subscribe-and-save option, which brings the price down to $48 for 30 servings. It’s worth signing up if you like them (and don’t mind automatic reorders). 

Want a full 5-gram dose from your creatine gummies? Try Legion Naturally Sweetened & Flavored Creatine Monohydrate Gummies.

Testing Breakdown

Create Creatine Gummies scored highly in every category except in terms of cost, but that’s the price you pay for a top-tier, independently certified product. 

Overall Rating: 4.4/5

Price Per Serving – 1
Formulation – 4
Taste – 5
Texture – 5
Side Effects – 5
Third-Party Testing – 5
Customer Experience – 5
Customer Reviews – 4.9

Vs. The Average

Create gummies are slightly more expensive than average, but come with the benefit of getting a full creatine dose in a smaller, more approachable serving size. 

Create Creatine GummiesAverage Creatine Gummy
Price Per Serving$2$1.47
Creatine Per Gummy 1.5 g1.25 g
Serving Size3 gummies4 gummies
Creatine Per Serving4.5 g4.5 g

Best Creatine Monohydrate Gummies: Legion Naturally Sweetened & Flavored Creatine Monohydrate Gummies

Perfectly Rated in Formulation
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.6
Legion Creatine Gummies
5 grams per serving
Multiple flavors
Gummy form
Subscribe and save 10%
Third-party tested
No artificial dyes or fillers
BOGO up to 50% off sitewide See Details
Product Type
Creatine gummy
Key ingredients
Creatine monohydrate
Price Per Serving
$1.67
Third-Party Testing
Labdoor
Gummy lovers
If you’d rather chew than drink your creatine, these are for you
Athletes
Third-party testing means it’s safe for those who may be drug-tested
Flavor hounds
Our testers love the taste and options
Pros
High marks on taste and flavors
5 grams of creatine per serving
Third-party tested
Subscribe and save
Cons
5 gummies per serving
8 grams of added sugar
More expensive than powdered creatine
Price Per Serving
$1.67, or less with a subcription
Flavors
Lemon Drop, Sour Watermelon, Sour Blue Raspberry, Sour Green Apple
Total Servings
30
Key ingredients
Creatine monohydrate, glucose syrup, sugar

Legion Creatine Gummies are a good option for those who don’t want to drink their creatine. Although it takes 5 gummies to reach one serving, and you’ll get 8 grams of added sugar, these taste great and are third-party tested.

At a Glance 

  • Subscribe-and-save available
  • 8 flavors to choose from
  • Full clinically validated 5-g dose of creatine
  • Sweet and slightly tangy

Known for producing high-quality supplements like Pulse pre-workout and Whey+ protein, Legion knocked it out of the park (again) with the brand’s easy-to-chew creatine gummies. Snagging our recommendation for the best creatine monohydrate gummies due to the research-approved 5-gram dose, they’re available in eight flavors.

Our tester—Director of Content and CPT Nicole Davis—tried the OG flavor, Lemon Drop, and notes, “I love that they’re third-party tested and taste great, to boot.” You can view the Labdoor test results on Legion’s website, and this level of transparency helped them earn a 5 out of 5 for third-party testing.

Taste: 4/5

A woman takes a bite of a Legion creatine gummy in her home gym
Our tester “quite likes them,” saying they’re sweet but not overly so. 

Third-Party Testing: 5/5

A woman holding a nickel next to five Legion Creatine Gummies to show the size comparison.
Legion creatine gummies are independently analyzed by Labdoor, a purity testing service.

Customer Experience: 5/5

A hand holds out five Legion Creatine Gummies, the serving size
Legion will refund you 100%, no questions asked, if you don’t like the product. 

Why We Like Legion Naturally Sweetened & Flavored Creatine Monohydrate Gummies

With no artificial sweeteners, fillers, or dyes, these tasty creatine gummies deliver 5 grams of creatine per serving, earning a perfect 5-out-of-5 formulation score. On the brand’s website, Legion notes that its products are made in NSF-certified and FDA-inspected facilities, which should give you further peace of mind about what you’re putting into your body.

These gummies check the box when it comes to taste, too, and Nicole rates them at 4 out of 5 in this all-important category. “They’re not super citrusy—more sweet than tangy, but I actually quite like them,” Nicole says. She rates them a 4 out of 5 for swallowability/texture, as well, adding, “They do get stuck in your teeth a little bit, as they’re a little soft and sticky, but it’s not horrible.”

We also love that the creatine source in these gummies is creatine monohydrate, which is the most extensively studied form of supplemental creatine. So, you know you’re reaping all of the known benefits of creatine when you use these Legion gummies.

At about $45 for a 30-serving bottle, these gummies also rank highly in terms of price and overall value. While there are cheaper options available, $1.67 per serving is solid for gummies (earning a 3 out of 5 for its cost), which tend to be more expensive than powdered creatine monohydrate. You can also subscribe for recurring monthly orders to drop the price further.

Plus, if you’re not satisfied with these gummies (even though we think you will be), you can get a full refund through Legion’s “No Return Necessary” money-back guarantee. That’s what we call top-notch customer service.

If you like gummies, the serving size is generous and you can theoretically snack on them all day as long as you get the proper serving size. Also, having 5 grams of creatine monohydrate per serving is exactly what you’re looking for.

Destini Moody, RD, CSSD, LD

Alternatives

Do note that a full serving of five gummies contains 8 grams of added sugar. We know that’s what makes them taste so good, but individuals watching their sugar intake may want to skip this product. Registered dietitian Destini Moody was not thrilled about this, saying, “Coming from a brand like Legion—who is known for naturally sweetened supplements that put health before profit—I was shocked to see 8 grams of sugar per serving from two different sources that also happen to be the first two ingredients.”

Additionally, Destini points out that the serving size is large and, “Not ideal for people who don’t like sweets or generally a mouth full of gummies.”

For Legion fans who prefer their creatine in liquid form, check out Legion Recharge. This creatine powder from Legion Athletics is a post-workout drink, but comes in several great-tasting flavors.

Testing Breakdown

One of the highest-scoring creatine gummy products overall, Legion impressed our testers with its full 5-gram dose of creatine, independent testing, and 100% money-back guarantee.

Overall Rating: 4.6/5

Price Per Serving – 3
Formulation – 5
Taste – 4
Texture – 4
Side Effects – 5
Third-Party Testing – 5
Customer Experience – 5
Customer Reviews – 4.7

Vs. The Average

Legion gummies cost $0.20 more than the average price per serving for creatine gummies. However, they have a 0.5-gram edge on the average dose of creatine per serving.  

Legion Naturally Sweetened & Flavored Creatine Monohydrate GummiesAverage Creatine Gummy
Price Per Serving$1.67$1.47
Creatine Per Gummy 1 g1.25 g
Serving Size5 gummies4 gummies
Creatine Per Serving5 g4.5 g

Read our full Legion Creatine Gummies review for more details.

Best Creatine Gummies on Amazon: Jacked Factory Creatine Gummies

Inexpensive and Readily Available
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.2
Jacked Factory Creatine Gummies
5 grams per serving
Multiple flavors
Third-party tested
Non-returnable
Subscribe and save
3 available flavors
Product Type
Creatine gummies
Price Per Serving
$1 per serving, or less with a subscription
Key Ingredients
Creatine monohydrate, glucose syrup, sugar, pectin, citric acid, sodium citrate, malic acid, calcium lactate, natural flavors, fruit and vegetable concentrate, stevia leaf extract, allulose
Third-Party Testing
Yes
Athletes
The gummies are third-party tested for quality and potency
Busy Individuals
These gummies offer a convenient way to enjoy your daily creatine
Flavor Lovers
These gummies are available in three flavors
Pros
Three available flavors
5 grams of creatine per serving
Third-party tested
Convenient gummy form
Cons
Contains added sugar and glucose syrup
Some users report a gritty texture
5 gummies per serving
Price per serving
$1 per serving, or less with a subscription
Flavors
Blue Raspberry, Lemon, Watermelon
Total Servings
30
Key Ingredients
Creatine monohydrate, glucose syrup, sugar, pectin, citric acid, sodium citrate, malic acid, calcium lactate, natural flavors, fruit and vegetable concentrate, stevia leaf extract, allulose

Jacked Factory Creatine Gummies offer a convenient way to get your daily creatine. They’re third-party tested and available in three flavors, but some users report a gritty texture, and each serving contains 70 calories, with both glucose syrup and sugar added to the formulation.

What our tester says:

“It tastes like tangy fruit, which I like. A little bit of an artificial taste, but overall, they’re pretty good.”

At a Glance 

  • High 5-g dose of creatine monohydrate
  • One of the most cost-effective gummy options
  • 4 flavors available
  • Sugar-free option contains sugar alcohols

If you’re looking for a convenient gummy form of creatine that you can easily add to your next Amazon purchase, Jacked Factory Creatine Gummies can be an excellent choice. With Amazon’s subscribe-and-save feature, they cost just $26 per container, which also makes them one of the most budget-friendly options at under $1 per serving. This cost-effectiveness, combined with the ease of ordering from Amazon (especially if you’re a Prime member), earn them a 5 out of 5 for customer experience.

They’re available in three flavors—Blue Raspberry, Lemon, Watermelon, and Green Apple—and contain 5 grams of creatine monohydrate per serving. 

RELATED: Best Protein Powder on Amazon

Taste: 4/5

Our tester putting a Jacked Factory creatine gummy in her mouth
Our tester trying Jacked Factory Creatine Gummies

Third-Party Testing: 3/5

Our tester holds a penny up next to a Jacked Factory Creatine Gummy for size comparison.
While we’d say the brand is fairly transparent, we wish Jacked Factory disclosed who did the third-party testing.

Texture: 4/5

Our tester holds Jacked Factory Creatine Gummies in her hand.
Our tester liked these gummies, but notes they are a little bit grainy in comparison to other options.

Why We Like Jacked Factory Creatine Gummies

These gummies earned 4 out of 5 stars for taste from our tester, Nicole Davis, CPT, PN1-NC. “These have a tang, which I like, but I wouldn’t guess they were Blue Raspberry,” Nicole states. “They taste like tangy fruit. They have a little bit of an artificial taste, but it’s not bad at all!”

“These are much firmer than other gummies I’ve tested and don’t get stuck in my teeth as easily,” she adds. “They are a little grainy feeling, though, so I’m giving them 4 out of 5 stars even though I like the texture, overall.”

The Jacked Factory gummies earned a respectable score of 4 out of 5 for their formulation, as well, due to the optimal dose of creatine. They use creatine monohydrate in the makeup, which is the most extensively studied form of creatine. 

There are 5 grams of creatine monohydrate. Considering that the efficacious dose has been shown to be anywhere from 3-5 grams, it’s safe to say that Jacked Factory was mindful enough to include the maximum dose.

Destini Moody, RD, CSSD, LD

Alternatives

We have to call out the sugar content with these creatine gummies from Jacked Factory. “8 grams of sugar is equivalent to eating two Starbursts or one Reese’s cup. While a treat like this is okay every now and then, considering creatine should be taken daily for optimal effects, this can be less than ideal for fitness enthusiasts,” says Destini Moody, RD, CSSD, LD. “Furthermore, it’s head-scratching why there are two different types of sugar (glucose syrup and white sugar) when the gummies are also sweetened with sucralose.” 

All that said, Jacked Factory must have heard the cries, because there is now a sugar-free option available. The Green Apple flavor is sweetened with maltitol, erythritol, and stevia leaf extract (which is still a lot of sweeteners). 

Jacked Factory also claims that these gummies are third-party tested, but there is no information as to who conducts the testing. We like to see third-party testing, but wish the company would disclose which lab is performing the trials. Accordingly, we rate these gummies at 3 out of 5 for third-party testing.

If you want another delicious gummy option that’s lower in added sugars, we recommend Swoly Creatine Gummies.

Testing Breakdown

Jacked Factory creatine gummies earned respectable scores across the board, with room for improvement in third-party testing.

Overall Rating: 4.1/5

Price Per Serving – 4
Formulation – 4
Taste – 4
Texture – 4
Side Effects – 5
Third-Party Testing – 3
Customer Experience – 5
Customer Reviews – 3.8

Vs. The Average

Jacked Factory Creatine Gummies are much less expensive than the average of $1.47 per serving, and they still contain a full dose of creatine. 

Jacked Factory Creatine GummiesAverage Creatine Gummy
Price Per Serving$1$1.47
Creatine Per Gummy 1 g1.25 g
Serving Size5 gummies4 gummies
Creatine Per Serving5 g4.5 g

Best-Tasting Creatine Gummies: Swoly Creatine Gummies

Just Like Gummy Bears
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.25
Swoly Creatine Gummies
Gluten-free
Low-sugar
Third-party tested
30-day return policy
Subscribe and save
Subscribe and save 27% See Details
Product Type
Creatine gummies
Price Per Serving
$1.27 per serving, or less with a subscription
Key Ingredients
Creatine monohydrate, sucrose, dextrose, maltodextrin, natural and artificial flavors, stearic acid, citric acid
Third-Party Testing
Yes
Athletes
Third-party testing means it’s safe for those who may be subject to drug testing
Flavor Lovers
Our testers love the flavor of these fun creatine gummies
Pros
High marks on taste and flavor
May be easier to take than creatine powder
Third-party tested
Subscribe and save 30%
Cons
Contains added sugar
Only 4 g of creatine per serving
5 gummies per serving
Price per serving
$1.27 per serving, or less with a subscription
Flavors
Strawberry
Total Servings
30
Key Ingredients
Creatine monohydrate, sucrose, dextrose, maltodextrin, natural and artificial flavors, stearic acid, citric acid

Swoly’s creatine gummies are a delicious way to take your creatine daily, especially if you don’t care for the powdered form. You’ll need five of these to reach a serving, and a serving is only 4 grams of creatine (not the research-backed dose of 5 grams that we like to see), but they taste great nonetheless.

What our tester says:

“These are friggin’ delicious. Like, need-to-make-sure-my-child-doesn’t-find-these-or-she-will-eat-them-all kind of delicious!”

At a Glance 

  • Affordable cost per serving compared to other gummy options
  • Only available in one flavor (strawberry)
  • Five gummies per serving
  • 4 g creatine per serving

For a great-tasting creatine gummy that will harken back to your childhood, Swoly has you covered with five gummy bears per serving (yes, gummy bears) that provide the recommended daily dose of creatine while managing to taste like the real candy.

Kate Meier, former GGR Senior Director of Content, tried the Swoly gummies alongside some members of her Olympic weightlifting team. She tells me they were a big hit, to say the least, which earned them a 5 out of 5 for taste and their rightful title as the best-tasting creatine gummies.

RELATED: Creatine Loading Phase: Is It Necessary?

Taste: 5/5

Our tester reaches into a tub of Swoly Creatine Gummies.
Our tester couldn’t stop raving about how delicious Swoly gummies are.

Third-Party Testing: 3/5

A person holds up the Supplement Facts label on a tub of Swoly Creatine Gummies.
Swoly says these gummies are independently tested, but we’re actually unsure of the accredited lab. That said, they are produced in a cGMP facility and have a transparent label. 

Price Per Serving: 3.5/5

Looking down into an opened tub of Swoly Creatine Gummies.
The $1.16 cost per serving is high for creatine, in general, but on the low end when compared to other creatine gummy options.

Why We Like Swoly Creatine Gummies

“These are friggin delicious. Dangerously delicious. Like, need-to-make-sure-my-child-doesn’t-find-these-or-she-will-eat-them-all kind of delicious!” Kate says. “They remind me of the best fruit snacks ever (Annie’s Homegrown Organic fruit snacks). I’d eat these as a snack every day.” The texture earns top marks, as well, with another 5-out-of-5 rating in our trials.

Plus, these creatine monohydrate gummies pack a full clinical dose of creatine into five delicious, strawberry-flavored gummy bears. Each gummy contains a little less than 1 gram of creatine (0.8 grams per gummy, to be exact), and a five-gummy serving gets you to a 4-gram dose of creatine monohydrate.

Other ingredients include sucrose, dextrose, maltodextrin, natural and artificial flavors, stearic acid, and citric acid—ya know, things that make a gummy a gummy. Because of additives like artificial flavors, we rate Swoly at 4 out of 5 for its formulation.

Kate also noted no unwanted side effects (other than an addiction to the gummies, which she is only sort of joking about), and rated them a 5 out of 5 in that category. 

I’d happily eat 50 of these in one sitting.

Kate Meier, GPT, USAW-L1

Alternatives

If you’re concerned about macros, you should know that there are 30 calories in a single serving of Swoly Creatine Gummies, including 2.5 grams of added sugar. Also, you’re hopefully a fan of Strawberry, as this is the only flavor available.

Additionally, competitive athletes should steer clear. Swoly gummies have a transparent and clear label, and are made in a Current Good Manufacturing Practice (cGMP) facility, but the brand does not disclose who does the stated third-party testing for contaminants or banned substances. For those with upcoming competitions on the horizon, it may be best to err on the side of caution. We rate them a 3 out of 5 for third-party testing.

If you want a bit more creatine out of your creatine gummies, try out Legion Naturally Sweetened & Flavored Creatine Monohydrate Gummies. Five gummies pack 5 grams of creatine in each serving.

Testing Breakdown

Swoly’s high overall rating comes from its high scores for taste, texture, and effects, along with customer experience.

Overall Rating: 4.4/5

Price Per Serving – 3.5
Formulation – 4
Taste – 5
Texture – 5
Side Effects – 5
Third-Party Testing – 3
Customer Experience – 5
Customer Reviews – 4.95

Vs. The Average

Cheaper than average but far, far tastier than your typical creatine, Swoly Creatine Gummies can be a worthwhile venture for flavor-seeking individuals.

Swoly Creatine GummiesAverage Creatine Gummy
Price Per Serving$1.27$1.47
Creatine Per Gummy 0.8 g1.25 g
Serving Size5 gummies4 gummies
Creatine Per Cerving4 g4.5 g

You can read more about this delicious supplement in our Swoly Creatine Gummies review.

Best Creatine Gummies with Flavor Options: Bounce Nutrition Creatine Gummies

Six Unique, Bold Tastes to Choose From
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
3.9
Bounce Nutrition Creatine Gummies
Multiple flavors
Non-GMO
Creatine monohydrate
60-day money-back guarantee
Subscribe and save 18%
All-natural and vegan-friendly formulation
Tasty Format
These gummies come in multiple fruity flavors like Strawberry Kiwi and Watermelon
Convenient Dose
Each serving delivers 6 g of creatine monohydrate in three gummies (or 4 g in two)
Allergen-Free
Manufactured in a facility free of gluten and other major allergens
Vegan-Friendly
Gelatin-free formula and vegan-friendly ingredients are suitable for plant-based diets
Creatine Beginners
Can be a smaller two-gummy dose, ideal for new users who don’t like mixing powders
Plant-Based Users
Vegan-friendly formula with all-natural ingredients
One-The-Go Athletes
Easy to toss into your gym bag and have a serving while on the move
Flavor Shoppers
Great option if you prioritize flavor in your supplements
Pros
Multiple flavors
All-natural and non-GMO
Vegan-friendly
6 g of creatine per serving
Cons
Expensive
Not third-party tested by a major lab
Creatine Per Serving
6 g
Sugar Per Serving
8 g of added sugars
Total Servings
10, 17, or 24
Flavors
Strawberry Kiwi, Watermelon, Blue Razz, Peach Rings, Cherry Lime, Berry Snow Cone

Bounce Nutrition Creatine Gummies are a flavorful option to get your daily creatine intake, with a three-gummy serving providing 6 grams of creatine monohydrate. With 2 grams of creatine per gummy, it’s also very easy to adjust your intake for beginning creatine users, too. While it’s expensive, these creatine gummies are vegan-friendly, made with natural ingredients, and are also third-party tested.

At a Glance 

  • 6 g of creatine per serving
  • Vegan- and allergen-friendly formula
  • High in sugar (8 g per serving)
  • Three gummies per serving

If you’re wanting to branch out in the flavor department when it comes to your creatine supplement, I suggest Bounce Nutrition Creatine Gummies. Available in six flavors, they’re not only tasty, but some flavors are very unique, with options like Peach Rings and Berry Snow Cone. GGR Senior Staff Writer Caine Wilkes rated them a 4 out of 5 for taste.

Plus, you can bundle multiple containers together to try them all out (and save some money in the process). 

Taste: 4/5

A container of Bounce Nutrition Gummies
The Cherry Lime flavor was received positively, if a bit mild, by our tester.

Texture: 3.5/5

Caine Wilkes holding Bounce Nutrition Gummies.
Our tester was a little taken aback by the soft, chewy texture of these gummies. It’s not bad, he says, but unexpected, nonetheless.

Third-Party Testing: 3/5

Caine Wilkes considering Bounce Nutrition Gummies
It doesn’t appear that Bounce Nutrition does any formal independent testing on these gummies, but there’s an emphasis on label transparency and clean manufacturing.

Why We Like Bounce Nutrition Creatine Gummies

Caine rates the Bounce Nutrition Creatine Gummies said he really enjoyed the (surprisingly mild) Cherry Lime flavor. 

Additionally, Caine—who also happens to be an Olympian from the 2020 Tokyo Games—appreciates the high creatine dose per serving of 6 grams, although it’s a little higher than the typical recommended dosage. “As a larger athlete, I usually take a higher dose of creatine, anyway, so I appreciate that Bounce doesn’t shy away from their dosage,” he states. 

For those wanting a smaller dosage, you can just take one less gummy and get 4 grams of creatine monohydrate from two gummies. While the formulation is solid with all-natural ingredients, there are 8 grams of added sugars in a serving, so the makeup gets a 4.5 out of 5 from us.

Those with dietary restrictions will appreciate that these Bounce Nutrition gummies are gluten-free, vegan, and non-GMO, too. They are also produced in an allergen-free facility and are free from milk, soy, wheat, egg, peanuts, tree nuts, fish, and crustacean shellfish. Caine didn’t experience any side effects after trying these gummies, rating them a 5 out of 5 in that category.

The texture is like a soft chew. The closest thing I can think of is candy corn, but it’s even softer than that.

Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Alternatives

While Caine likes the understated flavor of the Cherry Lime gummies he tried, he’s a little on the fence when it comes to the texture. He rates the swallowability at 3.5 out of 5, adding, “You shouldn’t have these expecting a gummy bear texture.” The mouthfeel is closer to a chewable candy, but the consistency begins to break down only after a couple chomps. “It wasn’t unpleasant…just unexpected,” continues Caine.

Texture aside, one of the biggest drawbacks to these gummies is the price, with a three-gummy serving costing nearly $3. Because you can bundle these, you can drop the price per serving down to around $2, but you’ll have to buy at least five containers to save that much. 

That said, it can be a great way to explore the several flavor options offered by Bounce Nutrition. You can even bundle them with the brand’s pre-workout gummies for an all-in-one order experience. Bounce Nutrition also offers an industry-leading 60-day money-back guarantee, which is almost unheard of in the supplement category. 

If you really want to lean into that chewable candy experience, we suggest Animal Creatine Chews (which, as a bonus, are around $1 per serving).

Testing Breakdown

While we like a lot about Bounce Nutrition Creatine Gummies, the expensive price per serving brings the overall score down.

Overall Rating: 3.8/5

Price Per Serving – 1
Formulation – 4.5
Taste – 4
Texture – 3.5
Side Effects – 5
Third-Party Testing – 3
Customer Experience – 5
Customer Reviews – 4.6

Vs. The Average

Bounce Nutrition Creatine Gummies are significantly more expensive than average if you take a full three-gummy serving. That said, they have a higher creatine dosage by 1.5 grams, and you have a roster of six different flavors to choose from. 

Bounce Nutrition Creatine GummiesAverage Creatine Gummy
Price Per Serving$2.79$1.47
Creatine Per Gummy 2 g1.25 g
Serving Size3 gummies4 gummies
Creatine Per Serving6 g4.5 g

Best Creatine Chews: Organifi Creatine Chews

Just Like Swedish Fish
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.05
Organifi Creatine Chews
Cherry flavor
Dairy-free
Soy-free
60-day money-back guarantee
Subscribe-and-save options available
Vegan-friendly and gluten-free
Save up to 25% on purchases of $200 or more + get free green juice + free s See Details
Chewable Creatine
Each serving offers 3 grams of Creapure creatine monohydrate in 2 cherry-flavored gummies
Recovery Support
Includes vital cherry extract to help support post-workout recovery and reduce muscle soreness
Vegan-Friendly
No dairy, gluten, or animal-based ingredients
Clean Formula
Naturally flavored and free from additives, sweeteners, and fillers
Recovery-Focused
Combines creatine with tart cherry for added recovery between workouts
Flavor-First Lifters
A gummy form is ideal for those who dislike the texture of powders
Vegan Shoppers
Plant-based option that’s also free of common allergens like dairy, gluten, and soy
Pros
3 grams of creatine per serving
Tasty cherry flavor
Travel-friendly
Vegan-friendly and gluten-free
Cons
Not third-party tested
Pricier compared to creatine powders
Only one flavor currently available
Creatine Dose
3 g per serving
Servings Per Pack
30
Notable Ingredients
VitaCherry Sport (cherry extract)
Sweetener
Tapioca syrup, beet sugar
Organifi Creatine Chews deliver 3 grams of Creapure creatine monohydrate in two sweet, chewable gummies that are easy to take for those who prefer to avoid powders. Although the price per serving is a bit higher than most creatine supplements, the vegan-friendly formulation includes vital cherry extract for added recovery support.

At a Glance 

  • Very chewy texture, per our tester
  • Includes tart cherry extract for recovery
  • 3 g of creatine per serving
  • Two-gummy serving size

If you enjoy chewy candy, you’ll love Organifi Creatine Chews, which rightfully earned their title as the best creatine chews. Our product tester and GGR team member Grant Smith tells me that the experience is “remarkably similar” to eating Swedish Fish. If that’s not the ideal chewy candy, I don’t know what is. On top of the delicious taste and texture—which both earned a perfect 5 out of 5 in testing—these chews provide a clinically backed dose of creatine in two gummies. 


RELATED: How Long Does Creatine Stay In Your System?

Formulation: 4/5

Holding a bag of Organifi Creatine Chews
The formula is straightforward and free of unnecessary ingredients, but contains a lower dose of creatine per serving than average.

Taste: 5/5

Organifi Creatine Chews on a table
Our tester appreciated the taste of these creatine chews, stating they’re reminiscent of Swedish Fish candy.

Third-Party Testing: 3/5

A hand holding Organifi Creatine Chews
There’s no indication that Organifi Creatine Chews are independently lab-tested, but in our experience, the brand is very transparent about ingredient sourcing and manufacturing. 

Why We Like Organifi Creatine Chews

“It’s chewy, for sure, but breaks down a bit easier than your typical gummy bear,” Grant says. “The flavor is nice and sweet, but there is a hint of an aftertaste that’s not as pleasant.” 

This aforementioned aftertaste does dissipate rather quickly, though.

Organifi’s Creatine Cherry Chews are unique in that they actually use tart cherry extract in their chews, which I’m sure helps with the Cherry flavor, but it’s also there to aid with muscle recovery. Some studies1 have shown that tart cherry juice may assist athletes with recovery after strenuous exercise. Along with 3 grams of creatine monohydrate in every two chews, this can help boost post-workout relief after an intense workout, so we score the formulation at 4 out of 5.

For those with dietary restrictions or specific preferences, Organifi chews are free from gluten, dairy, soy, and glyphosate—a known pesticide. 

These chews contain 3 grams of creatine per serving, which is on the low end of the clinically validated dose. They could be a good option for petite athletes or those who are just starting out with supplementation. If you want to take a third gummy for a 6-gram serving, that’ll drive up the price per dose.

Amanda Capritto, CPT, CES, CF-L1, CNC, CSNC

Alternatives

Organifi Creatine Cherry Chews certainly get a plus for their unique formulation and clean, vegan-friendly ingredients. Still, they contain 3 grams of added sugars.

If there’s any major drawback to Organifi’s creatine gummies, it’s the price per serving, which we scored a 4 out of 5. At nearly $1.45 per serving, it’s on the pricey side for creatine supplements, though not far off from the average for creatine gummies. Nevertheless, you can save with a subscription through Organifi, which automatically keeps you stocked on a regular basis with repeat orders.

If you’re looking for a creatine chew that most closely resembles a Sweet Tart, we recommend Animal Creatine Chews, which pack 5 grams of creatine in four chewable tablets.

Testing Breakdown

Organifi Creatine Chews have a high overall rating, driven primarily by perfect 5-out-of-5 scores for taste, texture, effects, and customer reviews.

Overall Rating: 4.3/5

Price Per Serving – 4
Formulation – 4
Taste – 5
Texture – 5
Side Effects – 5
Third-Party Testing – 3
Customer Experience – 4
Customer Reviews – 5

Vs. The Average

Organifi Creatine Chews are roughly on par with the average price of creatine gummies, though they contain less creatine per serving. 

Organifi Creatine ChewsAverage Creatine Gummy
Price Per Serving$1.43$1.47
Creatine Per Gummy 1.5 g1.25 g
Serving Size2 gummies4 gummies
Creatine Per Serving3 g4.5 g

Best Budget Creatine Gummies: Animal Creatine Chews

Affordable But Fully Dosed
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4
Animal Creatine Chews
5 grams per serving
Multiple flavors
Chewable form
Subscribe and save 10%
Third-party tested
Made with artificial sweetener
Product Type
Creatine chew
Key ingredients
Creatine monohydrate
Price Per Serving
$1.08
Third-Party Testing
Yes, but undisclosed where
Candy lovers
If you’d rather chew than drink your creatine, these are for you
Athletes
Third-party testing means it’s safe for those who may be drug-tested
Flavor hounds
Our testers love the taste and options
Pros
5 grams of creatine per serving
Third-party tested
Subscribe and save
Cons
Dry mouthfeel when chewing
4 chews per serving
Price Per Serving
$1.08
Flavors
Candy Crush’d, Fruit Punch, Grape, Lemon Ice
Total Servings
30
Key ingredients
Creatine monohydrate, sugar, dextrose, sucralose, Ace K

Animal Creatine Chews are reminscent of a Flintstone’s multivitamin, so received mixed feedback from our testers on taste and texture. However, they provide 5 grams of creatine monohydrate per serving as well as 25 milligrams of AstraGin and sea salt respectively.

At a Glance 

  • Costs just over $1 per serving
  • Texture is similar to a Sweet Tart
  • Subscribe-and-save on Amazon
  • 5 g creatine per serving

For a budget-conscious person who’d rather reach for a roll of Sweet Tarts over a bag of sour worms, Animal Creatine Chews might be for you. These are large, chewable tablets similar to Flintstones children’s multivitamins…If you know, you know. Plus, they cost just over $1 per serving, making them an affordable option for those seeking creatine powder alternatives. We awarded these Animal Creatine Chews a 4 out of 5 for price per serving.

Taste: 5/5

A hand holding Animal Creatine Chews
Our testers enjoyed the fruity flavor of Animal Creatine Chews and likened them to a Sweet Tart.

Texture: 4/5

Tub of Animal Creatine Chews
Animal Creatine Chews are like a chewable candy, though they are a bit dry. Have some water handy. 

Price Per Serving: 5/5

Animal Creatine Chews next to the tub
At just over $1 per serving, these are some of the most affordable creatine gummies/chews available.

Why We Like Animal Creatine Chews

In those four chews per serving, you get 5 grams of creatine, meaning there are 1.25 grams of creatine per chew. Former GGR Senior Director of Content Kate Meier, NASM-CPT, USAW-L1, CF-L1 tried these, too, and had mixed thoughts on the taste and texture. 

“They are chalky, just like a Sweet Tart. You definitely need a drink after chewing these tablets,” Kate says. “They do dry your mouth out a little. It’s not a deal-breaker, but something to know.” She ultimately rated the taste at 5 out of 5, saying, “We tried the Fruit Punch, and thought it tasted like a Cherry Sweet Tart. Definitely tastes good enough that I would take these every day, kind of like how you look forward to taking gummy vitamins.”

In addition to creatine, these Animal chews also contain sea salt and AstraGin. Sea salt provides sodium, an important electrolyte, and AstraGin is a nutrient bioavailability enhancer that may increase uptake of nutrients it’s consumed with. 

The remaining ingredients are typical candy findings, such as sugar, dextrose, maltodextrin, stearic acid, natural and artificial flavors, magnesium stearate, citric acid, malic acid, and beet root powder for color. 

Of course, since this isn’t pure creatine, there are calories and carbs. These contain 3 grams of carbs per serving; 2 grams, of which, are from added sugar, so Animal Creatine Chews earn a 4 out of 5 for formulation.

RELATED: Can You Dry Scoop Creatine?

It’s a bit of a mouthful to chew all four in a serving at once, but it’s doable. You definitely want to have water on hand!

Kate Meier, CPT, USAW-L1

Alternatives

“You have to take four of these to get 5 grams of creatine, and they aren’t small tablets,” Kate notes in reference to the overall size of each chew. “My Olympic weightlifting teammate took all four at once, while I did two and two. I wouldn’t want to pop these in my mouth without something to wash it down.” Accordingly, she rates the swallowability at 4 out of 5.

Those concerned with the purity of their supplements should know that while the brand claims these chews are independently tested, there is no disclosure as to who does the testing. It’s impossible to know based on the information provided if the chews are tested for banned substances or specific contaminants. As such, we rate the third-party testing at a conservative 3 out of 5.

Avoiding sugar? Check out Jacked Factory Creatine Gummies, which have a sugar-free option available in Green Apple flavor.

Testing Breakdown

With 4s and 5s in virtually every tested category, Animal Creatine Chews stand out for their low cost per serving and strong formulation.

Overall Rating: 4.3/5

Price Per Serving – 4
Formulation – 4
Taste – 5
Texture – 4
Side Effects – 5
Third-Party Testing – 3
Customer Experience – 5
Customer Reviews – 4.3

Vs. The Average

Budget-friendly and tasty, Animal Creatine Chews cost nearly $0.40 less per serving than the average creatine gummy. Yet, they still provide a full dose in each serving. 

Animal Creatine ChewsAverage Creatine Gummy
Price Per Serving$1.08$1.47
Creatine Per Gummy 1.25 g1.25 g
Serving Size4 chews4 gummies
Creatine Per Serving5 g4.5 g

Best Creatine Gummies for Muscle Growth: Bear Balanced Creatine Gummies

Includes Key Ingredients to Support Strength Gains
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
3.74
Bear Balanced Creatine Gummies
Gummy form
Multiple flavors
Sugar-free
No artificial flavors, colors, or sweeteners
Subscribe and save
30-day money-back guarantee
Product Type
Creatine gummy
Key Ingredients
Creapure creatine monohydrate
Price Per Serving
$1.67
Third-Party Testing
None
Gummy lovers
Gummy form might be preferred over drinking creatine.
Flavor hounds
You can choose from 6 flavors for variety.
Sugar-free eaters
There’s no added sugar in this formulation.
Pros
Several flavors available
Taste gets high marks
Only 3 gummies per serving
Beneficial added ingredients like L-theanine and L-tyrosine
Cons
Expensive at $1.67 per serving
Not third-party tested
Closer to 5 grams of creatine per serving would be more beneficial
Price Per Serving
$1.67
Flavors
Blueberry, Peach Mango, Watermelon Burst, Peach Mango+Watermelon, Watermelon + Blueberry, Peach Mango + Blueberry
Total Servings
30
Key Ingredients
Creapure creatine monohydrate, L-theanine, L-tyrosine, B12

Although these are on the more expensive side as far as creatine gummies go, Bear Balanced creatine gummies taste good and provide several flavor options. You’ll get 3 grams of Creapure in three gummies.

At a Glance 

  • Formula includes amino acids and B vitamins
  • Included Huperzine A can help support in-gym focus
  • 3 g creatine per serving
  • 3-gummy serving

For anyone looking to build muscle, Bear Balanced Creatine Gummies can be an excellent choice. One serving of three gummies has 3 grams of creatine—the minimum clinically recommended dose to support muscle growth—and you can always eat one or two more for a 4- or 5-gram serving. These gummies also include a couple of other ingredients that have been shown to help with muscle growth, so we rated their formulation a 4.5 out of 5.

Plus, the gummies are made from Creapure, a micronized creatine monohydrate developed in Germany. Micronized creatine is made of smaller particles, which are supposed to help creatine mix more easily (a plus when turning the powder into gummy form) and help with absorption. 

RELATED: Proper Creatine Monohydrate Dosage

Price Per Serving: 3/5

A bag of Bear Balanced Creatine Gummies
We give Bear Balanced a 3 out of 5 for price per serving because while it is run-of-the-mill for creatine gummies, these have a lower dose of creatine per serving than most.

Third-Party Testing: 5/5

Supplement Facts label on a bag of Bear Balanced Creatine Gummies
Bear Balanced Creatine Gummies are NSF Certified for Sport. This is considered the gold standard for testing supplements for banned substances.

Texture: 5/5

One serving of three Bear Balanced Creatine Gummies in hand
Our tester says these creatine gummies are reminiscent of actual gummy bears.

Why We Like Bear Balanced Creatine Gummies

Along with the clinical dose of creatine, the gummies have L-theanine and L-tyrosine, which have been shown to boost mental focus during exercise2 and cognitive function. That said, the L-tyrosine is short of the researched-backed dosage of 2 grams3. The inclusion of Huperzine A may also help you focus in the gym and give more effort to each set, though research does not fully support that idea4

The non-GMO, gluten-free, and vegan-friendly creatine chews come in three flavors: Peach Mango, Watermelon, and Blueberry. Our tester tried Blueberry, which is the OG flavor, and said the taste was pretty spot-on for a blueberry gummy. As such, they gave the taste a 4 out of 5.

Our tester also liked the texture of the gummies and rated Bear Balanced at 5 out of 5 for the category, adding, “The mouthfeel was very nice, reminding me of actually gummy bears.” 

Finally, Bear Balanced Creatine Gummies are NSF Certified for Sport, which earns them a 5-point score for third-party testing.

I think it’s great that these are a sugar-free option, since most creatine gummies contain sugar. But those sensitive to sugar alcohols will want to watch out—these contain 8 grams of sugar alcohols per serving.

Amanda Capritto, CPT, CES, CF-L1, CNC, CSNC

Alternatives

While our tester was a fan of the Blue Raspberry flavor, they say, “There’s a definite artificial flavor that comes through, which may not be everyone’s cup of tea.” Just something to be aware of if you tend to be sensitive to things of that nature.

The price is also a concern of ours with this creatine supplement. The gummies cost $1.67 without the Bear Balanced subscription savings. Gummies are going to be more costly than creatine powder, but this is still pricier than average for gummies.

For a pure creatine supplement that’s still not a powder, we suggest Optimum Nutrition Micronized Creatine Capsules. Four capsules provide 5 grams of creatine.

Testing Breakdown

Bear Balanced Creatine Gummies earned high scores for formulation, texture, and third-party testing. Here are our full ratings, based on our detailed testing methodology:

Overall Rating: 4.4/5

Price Per Serving – 3
Formulation – 4.5
Taste – 4
Texture – 5
Side Effects – 5
Third-Party Testing – 5
Customer Experience – 4
Customer Reviews – 4.4

Vs. The Average

We’d like to see a higher dose of creatine per serving, but Bear Balanced gummies still supply a clinically backed dose, albeit on the low end, compared to average. 

Bear Balanced Creatine GummiesAverage Creatine Gummy
Price Per Serving$1.67$1.47
Creatine Per Gummy 1 g1.25 g
Serving Size3 gummies4 gummies
Creatine Per Serving3 g4.5 g

Other Creatine Gummies We Researched

Admittedly, while the creatine gummy space is growing, there still aren’t a ton of options like there are with powders. That said, this roundup isn’t the end-all, be-all for every creatine gummy on the market. Below are a handful of other creatine gummies we’ve tested yet ultimately decided to leave off our best-of list.

Icon Muscle Creatine Gummies: Expert product tester Anthony O’Reilly says not to go for these because they contain more sugar per serving than creatine and, “The consistency is like that of dry Jell-O.” We also noticed that Icon Muscle does not list the type of creatine used in these gummies, which poses even more questions. (The label just says “creatine,” not “creatine monohydrate” or any other specific type.)

Icon Muscle Creatine Chews
A product tester holds a creatine gummy from Icon Muscle

Bloom Creatine Gummies: GGR Managing Editor and product tester Amanda Dvorak tested the Bloom Creatine Gummies and said, straight up, “They were awful.” While we appreciate the 5-gram serving of creatine, we can’t direct our readers to spend their money on products we can’t get down. 

Elm & Rye Creatine Gummies: Former product tester and GGR Editor Frieda Johnson had an overall terrible experience with this company and product. She ordered the gummies in April 2023 and didn’t receive them until late June 2023. She even emailed the company several times and customer support was not at all supportive. When she finally got the gummies, she realized that one serving contains just 48 milligrams (what?!) of creatine per serving. For reference, the recommended daily dose of creatine is 3 to 5 grams—not milligrams.

How We Picked and Tested the Best Creatine Gummies

This guide to the best creatine gummies started out just like the rest of our guides to dietary supplements: With lots and lots of research. We spent hours sifting through webpages to find high-quality creatine gummy supplements. We then ordered the products and tested them ourselves, judging each one against our testing methodology criteria for creatine. Such examined categories include: 

  • Formulation: We look at the type of creatine, the dose of creatine, and other ingredients to come to a score of 1 to 5 for formulation. Creatine monohydrate in a dose of 3 to 5 grams is the clinical standard, earning a 5-point score. Obviously, in a gummy, you’re not getting pure creatine monohydrate like you are with, for example, Optimum Nutrition 100% Creatine Monohydrate Powder. There will be sugars and fillers for taste and texture, and that’s OK. That said, are they quality ingredients, and are they necessary? Excessive fillers or sugars can bring down the score in this category. 
  • Taste and Texture: Are the gummies actually good? This is more important in a gummy candy than a powder or capsule, because you actually have to chew it. This could become more of a hassle than it’s worth if the product doesn’t taste good. This rating is subjective per the tester, but a 3-out-of-5 score indicates that the experience was as expected with no notable pros or cons. 
  • Side Effects: Did our tester experience cramping, bloating, or other problems after taking the product? To get a 5, there were no side effects reported post-consumption. 
  • Customer Experience: Sometimes, the experience with a company can negate any benefit of a product. We look into return policies, satisfaction guarantees, shipping, and reviews of customer service to see how companies value their patrons. To get a 5, the company is super responsive, the product is easy to order, and the company allows free returns (even if the supplement has already been opened).
  • Customer Reviews: What are actual buyers saying? Do reviews indicate that the purchase price is worthwhile? We look at multiple retail sites as well as the manufacturer site to get an average rating out of 5 for this category. 
  • Price Per Serving: One big thing to know is that creatine gummies cost substantially more than creatine powder and capsules. On average, the best creatine gummies cost between $1 and $2 per serving or more, whereas a high-quality creatine powder can cost less than $1 per serving. We use the average cost per serving to warrant a benchmark 3-out-of-5 rating.

RELATED: Creatine HCl vs Monohydrate

Benefits of Creatine Gummies

“Creatine monohydrate is the most well-studied form of creatine on the market,” says registered dietitian Perry Nix. “Compared to other types of creatine, it has the most evidence backing up its effectiveness.”

An image of a person holding a single Swoly creatine gummy next to the container
Our product tester holds out a gummy bear from SWOLY next to the container

There are thousands of studies on creatine benefits, ranging from its effects on athletic performance to cognitive health, heart health, and beyond. Whether it’s a powder, drink, gummy, or pill, all of the usual fitness benefits of creatine apply to creatine gummies, including: 

Increased Muscular Power

Arguably the most pronounced benefit of creatine supplementation is notable improvement in muscular force production. In practical terms, that’s your power clean PR or vertical jump personal best. This is because creatine plays a direct role in phosphocreatine (PCr) metabolism, a.k.a. the process by which your body makes energy for short, powerful bursts of high-intensity exercise. Due to this role, creatine is associated with improvements in sprint performance5 and jumping abilities6

Increased Muscular Strength

Not quite the same as maximal power, maximal strength is, in practice, your one-rep max deadlift, squat, and the like. Studies dating back to the 1980sreport significant improvements in muscular strength with as few as four weeks of creatine supplementation8. In fact, research has even found correlations between creatine supplementation and one-rep bench press and squat capabilities9

Improved Muscular Endurance 

While creatine is most positively associated with maximal strength and power, there’s some evidence that it can improve muscular endurance, too. If you love high-volume, lactate-producing, bodybuilding-style workouts, creatine supplementation can potentially increase your overall work capacity10. In one study11, those who took creatine and completed a strength training program built more total-body endurance over six weeks than those who did the same training program without creatine supplementation. 

Expedited Muscle And Workout Recovery

More research is needed to confirm this one, but it’s possible that creatine supplementation reduces the overall amount of muscle damage that occurs during exercise, thereby increasing your chances at a quick recovery12

Supports Muscle Growth

Between improvements in muscular strength, power, endurance, and muscle recovery, creatine is one of the best supplements you can take for muscle growth (as long as your training also reflects the demands for muscle growth, of course). 

“For exercise to be considered strength or resistance training, it must challenge your muscles to the point where they adapt and become stronger,” says Chris Mohr, PhD, RD. “This usually involves lifting weights, using resistance bands, or even your own body weight to create resistance. The key is to work the muscles until you get to the point of not being able to push out any more repetitions.”

Neuroprotection

For one, some research13 has shown that the amino acid compound may be neuroprotective, able to aid with brain health after traumatic injury or concussion. Other studies have shown that creatine may support brain health14 by increasing brain energy levels. This, in turn, can help influence and improve the brain’s performance. A 2021 review15 also shows that creatine can help reduce physical and mental fatigue.

May Reduce Dehydration

Creatine supplementation may support hydration 16 by retaining water in muscle cells. This is in contrast to the creatine myth that creatine causes dehydration. 

May Support Blood Sugar Control

One study from 200817 even found evidence that creatine supplementation might be able to support stable blood sugar. 

Creatine Gummies Are Travel-Friendly

If you travel a lot, creatine gummies are highly portable compared to powdered alternatives. Whether it’s a flight or a quick trip to the gym, popping a few creatine gummies in your gym bag can be simpler than carrying a tub of powder. If there’s any spilling, the creatine powder can get everywhere, too.

Creatine Gummies Can Help With Consistency

If we’re being honest, creatine gummies simply taste good, and that enjoyable flavor could make it easier to maintain a proper supplement schedule. Even if they’re not the best-tasting gummies, having a couple of creatine gummies can be much more convenient than other creatine forms. Many of our product testers swear to this; eating a few yummy creatine gummies is easier than grabbing a shaker bottle and blending up a serving of creatine powder.

Creatine Gummies vs. Creatine Powder

While both creatine gummies and powder have the same goal, both have differences, too.

A hand holds a Legion Creatine Gummy next to a Jacked Factory Creatine Gummy, to compare the size of the two gummies
Legion Creatine Gummy next to a Jacked Factory Creatine Gummy, for size comparison

RELATED: Creatine Gummies vs Powder

Cost

The biggest difference is the cost between these two forms of creatine. Pure, unflavored creatine powder is a much cheaper supplement, with costs under $1 in many cases. On the contrary, creatine gummies are rarely under $1 per serving. Compared to other supplements, both are less expensive, but just be ready for creatine gummies to routinely cost more.

Preparation

Creatine gummies are ready to go straight out of the bottle. Creatine powder, on the other hand, will need to be mixed with water or liquid of your choosing for safe and effective supplementation. As such, gummies can certainly be a more convenient supplement here.

Effectiveness

Creatine monohydrate is gradually released throughout the body. Because of this, there’s virtually no difference in the effectiveness of these creatine supplements. Each one can help you with muscle-building and athletic performance, as well as giving you the many other benefits of creatine.

Creatine Dosage

“Studies have shown that hypertrophy is best seen with doses of 3 to 5 grams of creatine,” says Destini Moody, RD, CSSD. Most creatine powders come with a 5-gram scoop, providing the upper end of the recommended dosage of creatine per serving. Creatine gummies can vary between 3 and 5 grams per serving, but can still provide you with a research-backed dose.

Side Effects

Creatine can cause some digestive issues, usually from a larger dose, but side effects are usually rare and minor. There’s a greater chance of creatine gummies leading to a negative side effect, however, mostly due to the other ingredients within the supplement. Some artificial and natural sweeteners are known to give some folks gastrointestinal issues, for example.

“Creatine sometimes causes bloating and belching, though this is usually temporary and most often reported during the ‘loading phase’ where you’re taking upwards of 20 grams daily,” says Christopher Mohr, PhD, RD. “Creatine causes a fluid shift, bringing fluids into muscle cells. This shift in fluid balance may cause gastrointestinal distress, but it is not unhealthy or dangerous and can usually be limited or eliminated by forgoing that loading phase and simply taking the ‘maintenance’ dose of 3 to 5 grams daily.”

Cons of Creatine Gummies

Although creatine gummies are colorful and sweet, there are some negatives to consider when discussing the sweet alternative to creatine powder.

  • Price: Although creatine gummies are convenient, they’re also more expensive than most creatine powders. If you can afford the price hike, it’s not a problem, but people needing to budget their supplements may need to weigh whether the price or form of creatine is more important to them.
  • Creatine Amount: To achieve the recommended dosage of creatine each day, you’ll have to take multiple gummies, usually between three to five gummies. With the size of some of these gummies being no joke, it can be a cumbersome serving size.
  • Side Effects: Depending on the additional ingredients in creatine gummies, you may be more likely to experience some side effects like bloating, gas, or other gastrointestinal discomfort. For example, sugar alcohol (a common ingredient in some creatine gummies) is known to cause digestive issues in many people.

Dosing and Interactions

Creatine is recognized as safe at the recommended dose of 3 to 5 grams per day for long-term use; a short-term creatine loading phase of consuming 20 to 25 grams of creatine per day for five to seven days is also recognized as safe. 

In both short- and long-term studies, no harmful effects of creatine have been reported18

That said, anyone who is managing a chronic health condition, is nursing or pregnant, or is taking prescription medications should talk to their healthcare provider(s) before taking creatine or any dietary supplement. 

There’s no wrong time during the day to take creatine, although many people will opt to consume it prior to working out to boost their energy and ATP production, or post-workout to aid in muscle recovery. 

What To Look For In Creatine Gummies

Most of us have had enough gummy bears over the years to know: Not every candy is made the same way. The same is true for creatine gummies. Here are a few factors to consider before buying your next batch of tasty creatine supplements.

Price Per Serving

The biggest pro when it comes to creatine gummies is their convenience, but unfortunately, that luxury comes with a higher cost compared to the likes of creatine powder. 

Since they have more ingredients and are processed differently, most creatine gummies fall between $1 and $2 per serving, with some even reaching as expensive as $3 per dose. For reference, creatine powders typically cost below $1 per serving, on average.

Other factors like ingredient quality and third-party testing may hike up the price, as well. Consider what cost you can comfortably afford in your budget and which factors are important to you before deciding on a creatine gummy.

Formulation

When looking at the formulation of the creatine gummy, there are two factors to consider: The ingredients and the amount of creatine in each serving. The effective dose of creatine is between 3 and 5 grams, so I’d recommend that most people aim for a creatine gummy that’s within that range on a full serving.

Added Ingredients

Creatine gummies will have more ingredients than plain creatine powder. Along with sugars and flavor additives, the gummies will likely feature syrups and other ingredients to create that classic gummy texture. 

Make sure to read the label thoroughly prior to checkout and determine the importance of certain ingredients. For example, are you trying to avoid sugar, or do you prefer natural sweeteners over artificial sweeteners?

We also recommend abstaining from supplements (of any category) that contain excessive helpings of filler ingredients.

Dietary Considerations

Along with noting the sugar content and filler ingredients of a creatine gummy, it’s also important to address any dietary preferences or restrictions you may have. It’s easy enough to consider whether you’d want to avoid sugar or artificial sweeteners in a creatine gummy, but there are other things to glance at, as well.

Most notably is the common presence of gelatin in many gummies, whether creatine gummies or just gummy bears. Gelatin is used to help create the chewy, elastic texture of a gummy. However, gelatin is derived from animal collagen—typically from cows or pigs—and may not align with specific dietary or moral practices.

RELATED: Plant Protein Vs Animal Protein

If you’re following a vegan diet, search for creatine gummies that use pectin—a plant-based alternative—to create that appealing gummy texture.

Type of Creatine

Creatine comes in many types. Creatine monohydrate is the most popular (and most researched) form of creatine, but other popular forms include Creatine HCl, which is more water-soluble and can be absorbed more quickly, and creatine nitrate. 

Creatine nitrate actually outperformed creatine monohydrate in a 2016 study19 for peak bench press and sprint performance, but the authors determined it wasn’t better for overall exercise performance.

Most creatine gummies on the market (and the ones we recommend) are made with creatine monohydrate, so it’s probably best to stick with what works.

Flavor and Texture

Flavor and texture are vital in creatine gummies; the main reason you’re taking them is to avoid bland or gross creatine powder! However, make sure to do some research before buying creatine gummies from an online retailer. Check customer reviews and see if a majority talk about gritty textures, weird aftertastes, or other odd mouthfeels before deciding on a supplement.

Third-Party Testing

We strive to recommend supplements that are independently tested through labs and vetted through screening agencies like the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) and Banned Substances Control Group (BSCG). When something is BSCG- or NSF-certified, that means an independent organization lab-tested it for contaminants and performance-enhancing drugs that can get athletes banned from sport. 

This is important because supplement companies are not heavily regulated by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), and studies have shown that as many as 89% of dietary supplements are mislabeled20.

That said, this doesn’t mean you should avoid them outright, unless you’re an athlete who is subject to drug testing. When shopping, if there is no third-party verification, look around for other indicators of transparency, such as information on ingredient sourcing and complete supplement facts or nutrition facts labels.

FAQs About the Best Creatine Gummies

What is creatine? 

Creatine is a compound created from the amino acids arginine, methionine, and glycine. It plays a role in the production of adenosine triphosphate (ATP), which is critical for muscle contraction. Though your body creates creatine on its own, increasing your creatine intake via supplements can saturate your muscle stores and give your body more to work with.

What does creatine do? 

Creatine is a performance enhancer and by improving athletic performance, it can result in greater lean muscle mass, among other benefits. For this reason, creatine supplements are very popular among bodybuilders and other strength athletes. It accomplishes this by increasing creatine levels in your muscles which, in turn, helps your body produce more ATP faster. This can lead to improvements in muscle strength and power. 

Is creatine the same as pre-workout?

No, creatine and pre-workout are not the same, but creatine is sometimes present in pre-workout formulations. The best pre-workout supplements contain many other ingredients, including beta-alanine, citrulline, caffeine, betaine anhydrous, and sometimes electrolytes.

RELATED: Creatine Vs Pre-Workout

Do creatine gummies work? 

Because creatine is a supplement that works gradually, the results of creatine supplementation should be the same, regardless of the form (pill vs. powder vs. gummy). As long as the amount of creatine is the same in each form, it should yield similar results.

References

  1. Hill JA, Keane KM, Quinlan R, Howatson G. Tart Cherry Supplementation and Recovery From Strenuous Exercise: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. Int J Sport Nutr Exerc Metab. 2021;31(2):154-167. 
  2. Gomez-Ramirez M, Kelly SP, Montesi JL, Foxe JJ. The effects of L-theanine on alpha-band oscillatory brain activity during a visuo-spatial attention task. Brain Topogr. 2009;22(1):44-51. 
  3. Young SN. L-tyrosine to alleviate the effects of stress?. J Psychiatry Neurosci. 2007;32(3):224.
  4. Wessinger CM, Inman CL, Weinstock J, Weiss EP. Effect of Huperzine A on Cognitive Function and Perception of Effort during Exercise: A Randomized Double-Blind Crossover Trial. Int J Exerc Sci. 2021;14(2):727-741.
  5. Bogdanis GC, Nevill ME, Aphamis G, et al. Effects of Oral Creatine Supplementation on Power Output during Repeated Treadmill Sprinting. Nutrients. 2022;14(6):1140.
  6. Izquierdo M, Ibañez J, González-Badillo JJ, Gorostiaga EM. Effects of creatine supplementation on muscle power, endurance, and sprint performance. Med Sci Sports Exerc. 2002;34(2):332-343.
  7. Butts J, Jacobs B, Silvis M. Creatine Use in Sports. Sports Health. 2018;10(1):31-34.
  8. Wang CC, Fang CC, Lee YH, Yang MT, Chan KH. Effects of 4-Week Creatine Supplementation Combined with Complex Training on Muscle Damage and Sport Performance. Nutrients. 2018;10(11):1640.
  9. Hoffman J, Ratamess N, Kang J, Mangine G, Faigenbaum A, Stout J. Effect of creatine and beta-alanine supplementation on performance and endocrine responses in strength/power athletes. Int J Sport Nutr Exerc Metab. 2006;16(4):430-446.
  10. Bogdanis GC, Nevill ME, Aphamis G, et al. Effects of Oral Creatine Supplementation on Power Output during Repeated Treadmill Sprinting. Nutrients. 2022;14(6):1140. 
  11. Mills S, Candow DG, Forbes SC, Neary JP, Ormsbee MJ, Antonio J. Effects of Creatine Supplementation during Resistance Training Sessions in Physically Active Young Adults. Nutrients. 2020;12(6):1880.
  12. Wax B, Kerksick CM, Jagim AR, Mayo JJ, Lyons BC, Kreider RB. Creatine for Exercise and Sports Performance, with Recovery Considerations for Healthy Populations. Nutrients. 2021;13(6):1915.
  13. Rae C, Digney AL, McEwan SR, Bates TC. Oral creatine monohydrate supplementation improves brain performance: a double-blind, placebo-controlled, cross-over trial. Proc Biol Sci. 2003;270(1529):2147-2150.
  14. Forbes SC, Cordingley DM, Cornish SM, et al. Effects of Creatine Supplementation on Brain Function and Health. Nutrients. 2022;14(5):921.
  15. Kreider RB, Stout JR. Creatine in Health and Disease. Nutrients. 2021;13(2):447.
  16. Greenwood M, Kreider RB, Melton C, et al. Creatine supplementation during college football training does not increase the incidence of cramping or injury. Mol Cell Biochem. 2003;244(1-2):83-88.
  17. Gualano B, Novaes RB, Artioli GG, et al. Effects of creatine supplementation on glucose tolerance and insulin sensitivity in sedentary healthy males undergoing aerobic training. Amino Acids. 2008;34(2):245-250.
  18. Kreider, R. B., Gonzalez, D. E., Hines, K., Gil, A., & Bonilla, D. A. (2025). Safety of creatine supplementation: analysis of the prevalence of reported side effects in clinical trials and adverse event reports. Journal of the International Society of Sports Nutrition, 22(sup1).
  19. Galvan E, Walker DK, Simbo SY, et al. Acute and chronic safety and efficacy of dose dependent creatine nitrate supplementation and exercise performance. J Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2016;13:12.
  20. Cohen PA, Avula B, Katragunta K, Travis JC, Khan I. Presence and Quantity of Botanical Ingredients With Purported Performance-Enhancing Properties in Sports Supplements. JAMA Netw Open. 2023;6(7):e2323879. 
]]>
Kettlebell Kings Kettlebells Review (2026): Top-Notch Quality That Reigns Supreme https://www.garagegymreviews.com/kettlebell-kings-kettlebells-review Sat, 31 Jan 2026 14:45:45 +0000 https://www.garagegymreviews.com/?p=248284 Of all the strength training tools you can have in your arsenal, few offer as much bang for your buck as the good ol’ kettlebell. From snatches and swings to goblet squats and Turkish get-ups, the best kettlebells allow you to execute a wide range of movements safely and effectively. 

Even though most ‘bells look similar on the surface, some feel and perform better than others. While there are plenty of high-quality options on the market, you’ll be hard-pressed to find a better long-term investment than a brand that quite literally wears the crown. In this Kettlebell Kings Kettlebells review, I’ll dive into what makes them a top-tier choice for both beginners and experienced lifters who want to train with equipment fit for the throne. 

Our Kettlebell Kings Kettlebells Review, Summarized

Kettlebell Kings kettlebells feature a flat base and sturdy, single-piece cast-iron design that makes them ideal for home gym owners looking to enhance their strength and conditioning routine. Boasting a similar look and feel to Rogue kettlebells, they come in a wide range of sizes, though it may be a bit of a challenge to find specific ones at certain retailers. Our expert product tester gave these a perfect score for construction, which speaks volumes about the build quality and reliability of these high-value ‘bells.

How We Test Kettlebells

A well-made kettlebell should feel balanced, sit flat on the floor, and tolerate repeated use without chipping, loosening, or cracking. We take note of the shape, build materials, and casting process, awarding top scores to traditional ‘bells with single-piece, cast iron or steel profiles that showcase even weight distribution and teeter-free bases.

Rogue E-Coat kettlebell on the floor in front of a product tester

We assess whether a kettlebell comes in imperial or metric weight totals (pounds or kilograms), and how expansive the weight range is. The best manufacturers not only offer kettlebells in different weight increments to support progressive overload, but also provide clearly marked weight indications in both pounds and kilograms, so you can focus on working—not converting. A 3-out-of-5 rating means the available weight range is moderate enough for varied training needs, but stronger athletes may be left underserved for certain lifts. 

A woman is adjusting the weight plates inside a Bells of Steel Adjustable Kettlebell.

What good is a kettlebell if you can’t keep a firm grasp on it during your workout? When evaluating the handle, we consider the diameter, the grip performance (with and without chalk), and how well you can control the weight during long sets where sweaty palms may become an issue. Benchmark scores of 3 out of 5 are given to kettlebells with a comfortable, controllable handle that may be prone to slippage with sweatier hands.

A person holds up an Ironmaster Quick-Lock Adjustable Kettlebell

Over the years, we have developed a thorough kettlebell testing methodology that helps us evaluate kettlebells in relevant categories such as construction, durability, weight options, shape, value, and more. Our expert product testers put every ‘bell through a bevy of kettlebell exercises—including snatches, swings, Turkish get-ups, and goblet squats—to provide accurate ratings based on a scale of 1 to 5.  

kb goblet squat with amazon basics kettlebell

The Garage Gym Reviews team includes certified personal trainers, CrossFit competitors, Olympic-level athletes, and strength training enthusiasts who can easily distinguish a high-quality e-coat or powder coat finish from a low-quality skin. To date, our team has tested more than 30 of these popular free weights over the years (with plenty more to come). 

In 2024, we helped more than 350 athletes and home gym owners find their ideal ‘bell, and we’re ready to help connect you with the right one, too.

Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC, setting up an Ironmaster Quick-Lock Adjustable Kettlebell
Kettlebell Kings Kettlebells
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.2
Kettlebell Kings Powder Coat Kettlebells
Single-cast iron
Powder-coated
Flat base
Free shipping via Prime
Lifetime manufacturer’s warranty
Weight range of 9 to 97 lbs
Gravity Casting
Kettlebell Kings uses a single-piece gravity casting system to construct these powder-coated kettlebells.
Impressive Grip
Per our tester, the handle is tacky enough for most movements but can become slippery with excessive sweat.
Lifetime Warranty
These durable kettlebells are covered by an impressive lifetime warranty.
Buying Options
You’ll need to shop around for these ‘bells, as Kettlebell Kings no longer offers a branded retail page.
Home Gyms
We love the available weight range of these Kettlebell Kings kettlebells, and the flat base helps improve storage.
Beginner Athletes
Our tester says the handle is comfortable and grippy, making it ideal for those just starting with kettlebell workouts.
Big Spenders
You could pay upwards of $330 for a single kettlebell, depending on your online retailer.
Pros
Great weight accuracy
Works well with or without chalk
Comes with a lifetime warranty
21 weight options written in kilos and pounds
Cons
Price is on the higher end
Thicker handle at heavier totals may be hard to grasp for smaller hands
Some reviewers found the paint or coat chipping
Material
Cast iron
Weight Range
9-97 lbs
Finish
Powder coat
Handle Diameter
Varies by chosen weight
Kettlebell Kings kettlebells are available in varying weights from 9 to 97 pounds and feature a single-cast iron construction with a tacky yet comfortable powder-coated exterior. According to our tester, these ‘bells can withstand plenty of wear and tear, and the brand even offers a lifetime warranty against defects—a unique coverage plan for kettlebells.

What to Know Before You Buy

  • Although you used to be able to purchase them directly on kettlebellkings.com, you will have to look on Amazon, Walmart, or other online retailers to find the ideal Kettlebell Kings Kettlebell profile for your training needs. There are differences in price and weight options through each retailer, so be sure to check both before you make a final decision.
  • While we’ve only tested the brand’s traditional kettlebells, Kettlebell Kings also offers competition-style kettlebells for those who prefer standardized sizing and a consistent feel across all weights. 
  • These cast iron kettlebells come with a lifetime warranty, which should give you more peace of mind about your purchase. Many manufacturers offer around one year of coverage, so this adds even more value. 

Are Kettlebell Kings Kettlebells Worth It?

It may be a bit of a challenge to find specific kettlebell weights and sizes, but we think it’s worth scavenging Amazon, Walmart, and other retailers for Kettlebell Kings kettlebells. They check all the boxes for aesthetics, performance, and durability, making them a wise long-term investment for strength and conditioning enthusiasts of all experience levels. 

While they aren’t as affordable as something like Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells (one of our top recommendations for budget-friendly kettlebells), you certainly get what you pay for in terms of build quality. Outside of limited availability based on what’s in stock, it’s hard to find a major knock against Kettlebell Kings. 

Great for:
Home gym owners who want a durable traditional kettlebell that should last for years
Hardstyle training enthusiasts in need of a comfortable, controllable handle shape
Beginners who want a comfortable, secure grip while mastering their technique
Not recommended for:
Anyone who wants to purchase kettlebells in pairs or a complete set  
Kettlebell sport athletes who need standardized dimensions
Budget-focused buyers looking for the lowest costs available

Are you still eyeing the crown? Read on to find out some key specs and metrics for Kettlebell Kings powder-coat kettlebells.

Kettlebell Kings Kettlebells: Key Features & Specs

PriceCheapest: $52.99
Most Expensive: $330
Weight Range9-97 lbs
Handle DiameterVaries by size
Materials and CoatingCast iron construction with powder-coat finish
Color-coded Handle?Yes
WarrantyLifetime warranty

Workout Experience with the Kettlebell Kings Kettlebells

GGR Director of Content Nicole Davis, CPT, PN1-NC is a busy mom of three who refuses to let a packed schedule stop her from staying on top of her fitness game. One of the ways she’s been able to remain consistent is by relying on Kettlebell Kings kettlebells for at-home workouts. As someone who owns ‘bells from multiple brands, Nicole understands the small design nuances that can make a big impact on your training experience. After several years of ownership, let’s just say she’s ready to place Kettlebell Kings kettlebells on their rightful throne. 

Although Nicole has put these kettlebells through it, storing them in the garage during the summer and fall for outdoor workouts, they still work well. The bottoms are a bit rusted, but that doesn’t affect the functionality at all.

I’ve spent the last 2.5 years training almost exclusively with these kettlebells in my basement. They have come in handy for my busy lifestyle. The flat base allows me to keep them securely stored and out of my kids’ way once I’m finished.

Nicole Davis, CPT, PN1-NC

Kettlebell Kings Kettlebells Rating

Overall Rating: 4.2/5

Construction – 5
Durability – 4
Handle – 3
Weight Options – 5
Purchasing/Shipping – 4
Overall Value – 4
Customer Service – 4
Customer Reviews – 4.7
Check Price
Our tester Nicole Davis, CPT, PN1-NC, working out with a Kettlebell Kings Kettlebell.
Our tester Nicole Davis, CPT, PN1-NC, working out with a Kettlebell Kings Kettlebell.

Construction

Product Rating – 5
Average Kettlebell Rating – 4.4

Not all kettlebells are created equal. Thankfully, Kettlebell Kings prioritizes build quality by using single-cast iron with no present welds to create a sturdy, stable free weight profile. This is our preferred manufacturing method, as welded models can be more prone to durability issues and balance inconsistencies. 

Speaking of balance, you won’t have to worry about that, according to Nicole. “The bottom is flat, so no issue there,” she says in reference to her 5-out-of-5 construction rating. “These are also very sturdy.” 

A set of Kettlebell Kings Kettlebells
An assortment of Kettlebell Kings kettlebells in our tester’s home gym.

In addition, these kettlebells feature a high-quality powder coat finish. In our experience, this slightly textured, matte material provides more friction and a better overall grip than e-coat or glossy overlays. This can particularly come in handy (no pun intended) when performing classic exercises like kettlebell swings, cleans, presses, and carries—especially if you train without chalk.

Durability

Product Rating – 4
Average Kettlebell Rating – 4.3

Earning a rock-solid durability score of 4 out of 5, you can count on Kettlebell Kings kettlebells to survive repeated use. In fact, even Nicole seems impressed with how well hers have held up. “I’ve had these for almost three years and they still function great,” she explains. 

This integrity can be attributed to the single-cast design that helps prevent cracking, loosening, or other structural failures that can be more prominent across welded silhouettes. If you’re routinely dropping your ‘bells (overtop proper home gym flooring, of course) then you’re likely to appreciate this burlier design.

Holding a Kettlebell Kings Kettlebell
While some scuffs are likely, these cosmetic faults don’t compromise the performance of Kettlebell Kings kettlebells.

Nicole did dock one point off the durability score, though, due to some visible rusting and chipping. That said, she admittedly took some responsibility for rust forming on the bottom. “It was probably my fault for leaving these outside in the garage during most of the year,” she explains. Luckily, the chipped coating on two of her lighter weights has, as she states, “No effect on the actual functionality.”  

Handle

Product Rating – 3
Average Kettlebell Rating – 4.4

Despite an ergonomic shape and comfortable diameter, the handle on these Kettlebell Kings kettlebells isn’t the best we’ve tested. At the same time, it’s not a major detriment to your workout experience. 

There’s no specific information available on the handle diameter for each size in the Kettlebell Kings lineup, Nicole says her 15-kilogram kettlebells have a 35-millimeter handle diameter, which is right around the average (34.87 millimeters).  She also has 6-kg and 8-kg models that measure just over 32 millimeters. 

Our tester Nicole Davis, CPT, PN1-NC, working out with a Kettlebell Kings Kettlebell.
Our tester Nicole Davis, CPT, PN1-NC performing a Turkish get-up with a Kettlebell Kings Kettlebell.

“My hands are on the smaller side and these grips are fine for me,” she says. “For reference, I have a 24-kg powder coat Rogue kettlebell that has a large diameter handle, and I struggle with that one a bit if I have to go one-handed.”

While we’re OK with the varying grip diameters, we still rate the handle at a conservative 3 out of 5 since these kettlebells can present some grip issues, depending on the elements. 

“Especially in the summer when my hands get moist during a workout, I notice that the grip slips on the 15s, so chalk would be ideal,” Nicole says. “If I’m not overly hot, I have no issues, but this would be important if you sweat when you work out.”

Weight Options

Product Rating – 5
Average Kettlebell Rating – 4.3

Kettlebell Kings offers these kettlebells in a wide range of sizes ranging from 9 pounds to 97 pounds. This can provide ample flexibility for progressive overload, which is shown to promote gains in muscular strength and hypertrophy1. This assortment also makes it easier for beginners to get started with manageable weights. Kettlebell Kings uses a precise gravity casting process to ensure each bell meets international weight standards—something you don’t see on cheaper ‘bells. 

Our tester lifting a Kettlebell Kings Kettlebell
Selecting a weight across the Kettlebell Kings kettlebell lineup is easy thanks to the color-coded bands at the base of each handle.

Furthermore, we appreciate that these kettlebells have color-coded handles and dual weight markings for easy identification. This can be a particularly user-friendly feature that can help keep your workouts efficient; you don’t have to do any conversions or calculations mid-training. Overall, these earned a perfect weight options score of 5 out of 5.

Purchasing/Shipping

Product Rating – 4
Average Kettlebell Rating – 4.5

Although Nicole awarded a 4-out-of-5 rating in this category, it’s important to note that the purchasing process is different than when she acquired her Kettlebell Kings kettlebells several years ago. At that time, she was able to purchase them directly from the company website. At the time of this review, though, that appears to no longer be the case. 

“These seem to only be available on third-party retail sites like Amazon and Walmart now, but they do offer free shipping,” Nicole explains. “However, just as I’m looking today, the weight options do seem slim.” 

After doing some more digging, I can confirm some of those availability concerns. Amazon does have a few different sizes available, but the entire range is not offered online. Ditto for Walmart. So, even though you may get free shipping from these third-party retailers, you may struggle to find specific sizes. 

Another factor to consider: You can’t buy these in pairs or sets. That could be frustrating for folks looking to build a robust collection in a single purchase. If that’s the case, you may want to look at another option like the REP Fitness Kettlebell Set.

Overall Value

Product Rating – 4
Average Kettlebell Rating – 4

Available for roughly $4.50 per kilogram on Amazon, these kettlebells are priced fairly, according to Nicole. However, they’re significantly more expensive at Walmart, making the former a more attractive option. 

Ultimately, though, are these a wise investment? I’ll let our expert break it down: 

“These are worth the money—they are super solid and still work great after three years of heavy use,” Nicole says. “I already had a random 25-pound kettlebell from Amazon, and I also added a 24-kg powder coat model from Rogue. I like the KB Kings ones just as much as the Rogue one; they’re about the same price and feel similar in quality.”

Our tester Nicole Davis, CPT, PN1-NC, working out with a Kettlebell Kings Kettlebell.
Our tester Nicole Davis, CPT, PN1-NC, working out with a Kettlebell Kings Kettlebell.

The takeaway here: If you are able to find the Kettlebell Kings kettlebells you’re looking for, you won’t be disappointed with your purchase. As a result, we rate the value at a 4 out of 5.

Customer Service

Product Rating – 4
Average Kettlebell Rating – 4.3

Unfortunately, because you cannot purchase these kettlebells directly from the manufacturer, you’re subject to the retailer’s return policy. In Amazon’s case, that’s just a 30-day window. On the other hand, Walmart offers a 90-day return policy. That’s a sizable difference that may be worth considering if you have any hesitation about investing in these ‘bells.

RELATED: Best Budget Home Gym Equipment on Amazon

That said, one of the reasons we rewarded Kettlebell Kings with a strong customer service score of 4 out of 5 is its warranty policy. These kettlebells come with lifetime coverage—a huge perk for a product that’s bound to get tossed around. Nicole cautions that she’s not sure how that works with the retailer if you do run into any issues, so it’s worth looking into before you finalize your cart. 

Customer Reviews

Product Rating – 4.7
Average Kettlebell Rating – 4.7

To help paint a complete picture of how these kettlebells are viewed, we averaged the customer ratings from Amazon (4.4 stars) and Walmart (4.9 stars) to give a composite score of 4.7 stars. Overall, customers appreciate the high-quality powder-coat finish and balanced design. There is some mixed feedback about shipping and durability issues, as you’ll see in the testimonials below:

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is image-5-1024x753.png

Kettlebell Kings Kettlebells Vs

From afar, you’d be hard pressed to tell the difference between a kettlebell from Kettlebell Kings and GIANT Lifting. I personally tested the V3 Kettlebell from GIANT, and based on Nicole’s feedback, it’s clear the two brands have constructed very similar products. 

Both kettlebells boast the same single-piece cast iron design with a powder-coated finish. They also both feature color-coded handles and dual weight markings; a nice aesthetic and functional touch that makes it easy to switch weights mid-workout. However, while Nicole only rated the Kettlebell Kings’ handle at 3 out of 5, I gave the V3 Kettlebell a perfect score. 

GIANT offers a similar weight range (9 pounds to 107 pounds), but you should have a much easier time finding the size you want compared to Kettlebell Kings, especially since you can order them directly from the manufacturer. Check out my full GIANT V3 Kettlebell review for more insight.

If you’re OK with sacrificing some build quality for a lower cost, you could also look at the Yes4All Vinyl Kettlebells. These are our best budget pick, though you should be aware that they earned below-average scores for construction (2.5 out of 5) and durability (2.5 out of 5). Still, it’s hard to argue with the price, as the cheapest option (5 pounds) costs just $13.73.

Kettlebell Kings KettlebellsGIANT Lifting V3 KettlebellYes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells
PriceCheapest: $52.99Most Expensive: $330Cheapest: $35 Most Expensive: $277.78Cheapest: $13.73Most Expensive: $154.82
Weight Range9-97 lbs9-106 lbs5-90 lbs
Handle DiameterVaries by size30-40 mm, depending on kettlebell size40 mm
Materials and CoatingCast iron construction with powder-coat finishPowder-coated ironCast iron with vinyl coating
Color-coded Handle?YesYesNo
WarrantyLifetime warranty1 year1 year

Final Verdict of Our Kettlebell Kings Kettlebells Review

If you’re looking for cast iron ‘bells that can get the job done for years to come, look no further than Kettlebell Kings. Based on Nicole’s three years of ownership, we’re confident these will remain a staple in your strength training repertoire for the long haul. They’re sturdy, stable, and durable tools you can use for everything from building muscle and strength to improving your cardiovascular fitness

Ultimately, this in-depth kettlebell review confirms that Kettlebell Kings kettlebells still reign as some of the better choices on the market. 

  • These single-piece, cast iron ‘bells have a high-quality powder-coat finish that helps with durability.
  • Pricing varies, with Amazon generally being more affordable than Walmart and other online retailers.
  • In addition to traditional kettlebells, Kettlebell Kings also sells competition ‘bells for folks who participate in CrossFit or similar styles of training.
  • Finding the right size can be a challenge, so check with third-party retailers to see all your available options.

Kettlebell Kings Kettlebells Review: FAQs

What is the difference between traditional kettlebells and adjustable kettlebells? 

Traditional kettlebells have a fixed weight and one-piece design that’s usually made from cast iron or steel. Adjustable kettlebells, conversely, are a space-saving solution that allows you to add or remove weight using pins, dials, bolts, or similar mechanisms. 

What is the best brand for kettlebells?

While there are many respectable kettlebell brands, some of our favorites include REP Fitness, Rogue, Bells of Steel, and Titan Fitness. Kettlebell Kings also scored highly, according to our kettlebell testing methodology. 

Are kettlebells better than barbells or dumbbells? 

Kettlebells, dumbbells, and barbells all have unique properties that make them useful for a variety of athletes and training purposes. Barbells excel for maximum strength efforts and are utilized in sports like powerlifting and Olympic lifting, while kettlebells and dumbbells can work well for dynamic exercises and are more beginner-friendly. Ultimately, utilizing all three can be an effective way to achieve your fitness goals.

References

  1. Chaves, T. S., Scarpelli, M. C., Bergamasco, J. G. A., Silva, D. G. D., Medalha Junior, R. A., Dias, N. F., Bittencourt, D., Carello Filho, P. C., Angleri, V., Nóbrega, S. R., Roberts, M. D., Ugrinowitsch, C., & Libardi, C. A. (2024). Effects of Resistance Training Overload Progression Protocols on Strength and Muscle Mass. International journal of sports medicine, 45(7), 504–510. https://doi.org/10.1055/a-2256-5857
]]>
Best Ellipticals Under $1,000 (2026): Affordable, High-Quality Cardio Machines For Home Use https://www.garagegymreviews.com/best-ellipticals-under-1000 Fri, 30 Jan 2026 15:25:24 +0000 https://www.garagegymreviews.com/?p=126271 If bargain hunting was a sport of its own, we’d have at least a few championships on our resume. After all, the Garage Gym Reviews team takes tremendous pride in finding the best budget gym equipment, so you can crush your health and fitness goals without breaking the bank. We research, test, and examine plenty of products; elliptical machines, included.

If you’re looking for a low-impact, low-cost way to improve your cardiovascular fitness at home, we’ve searched far and wide to find the best ellipticals under $1,000. Our team of certified personal trainers, active athletes, and longtime exercisers has personally tested more than 30 ellipticals, from high-end models with all the bells and whistles to budget-friendly profiles and beyond. To support our testing over the years, we’ve established a detailed elliptical testing methodology that grades each profile on a scale of 1-5 in key categories, including:

  • Footprint and Portability: Does the elliptical have a compact design, or is it a sizable machine that requires a lot of space? Does it have transport wheels or a folding mechanism for easier storage and maneuverability? To earn a 3 out of 5 in this category, one or two people should be able to move the machine around without much strain.
  • Adjustability and Ergonomics: How comfortable is the machine mid-workout? To meet our threshold for a 3-out-of-5 rating, an elliptical should have both fixed and moving handlebars, oversized foot pedals that can accommodate most athletes, a stride length of 18 to 20 inches, and soft grips on the aforementioned handles for improved in-hand coziness.
  • Tech Capabilities: The best ellipticals are often equipped with touchscreen displays, Wi-Fi-enabled consoles, built-in speakers and more. We award at least a 3 out of 5 as long as a machine has a basic screen that displays key workout metrics, available heart rate monitoring via contact sensors, and some sort of workout animation that allows you to view your training progress.  
  • Conveniencies: Does the machine have basic creature comforts like a device holder, water bottle holder, and adjustable cooling fans? We give at least a 3-out-of-5 score if there’s one water bottle holder, a media shelf, and a safety stop key. 

In addition to our research and testing data, we consulted with GGR Chief Medical Advisor, Dr. Raj Dasgupta, MD, FACP, FCCP, FAASM and exercise physiologist Dr. Chris Mohr, RD, to discuss the benefits of cardiovascular exercise. Last year, we helped over 1,300 people find a high-quality elliptical machine, and we’re here to help you do the same—all for less than $1,000.

The 6 Best Ellipticals Under $1,000

Current Top Deals

Now is a great time to upgrade your home gym with major sales from top fitness brands. Check out the deals below to find an elliptical that suits your goals and budget.

Latest Updates

In February 2026, we reviewed our list of the best ellipticals under $1,000 and made a few changes based on our latest testing. The ProForm Carbon EL still earns our top recommendation, but we swapped out picks that didn’t hold up in adjustability and ergonomics as well as value. New additions—like the YOSUDA EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical—stood out for their high scores in these categories.

Best Overall Elliptical Under $1,000: ProForm Carbon EL

Updated by: Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC

High-Value With Excellent Programming 
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4
ProForm Carbon EL Elliptical
Solid warranty
iFIT compatible
Budget-friendly
10-year frame warranty
10-year frame, 1-year parts & labor
19” adjustable stride length
Winter Sale: Up to $400 off smart machines & $800 on bundles See Details
Full-Body Workout
With moving arms and 18 resistance levels, it targets both the upper and lower body
Durable Construction
Built with a quality steel construction able to support up to 275 pounds
iFIT Integration
Syncs with iFIT for trainer-led workouts and scenic routes
Budget Buy
Priced under $1,000, it’s one of the more affordable smart ellipticals
Streaming Workouts
Great for those who want guided sessions and scenic rides via iFIT
Low-Impact Seekers
Helps reduce joint strain while still offering a solid cardio burn
Budget Shoppers
Decent features for an elliptical priced under $1,000
Pros
18 levels of resistance for varied training
Adjustable stride length
iFIT offers tons of interactive training
Smooth and quiet ride
Cons
iFIT membership costs extra
No built-in touchscreen display
Lighter flywheel than higher-end models
Resistance Levels
18 digital resistance levels
Stride Length
19″ stride length (adjustable)
Weight Capacity
275 lbs
Warranty
10-year frame, 1-year parts & labor
The ProForm Carbon EL is an elliptical machine that offers adjustable resistance and stride length. You can also sync it up with iFIT programming (which will cost extra). At just under $1,000, this is a high-value budget elliptical.

At a Glance 

  • Sturdy elliptical with iFIT compatibility
  • Heavier elliptical at 205 lbs
  • Below-average 275-lb weight capacity
  • 10-year frame warranty exceeds the standard

Available for just under the $1,000 threshold (you may be able to find it even cheaper during sales windows), the ProForm Carbon EL is our top overall pick because it offers tremendous value and performance without an inflated price tag. We particularly like that it syncs with iFIT, an interactive programming platform that offers over 10,000 on-demand courses catering to disciplines like cardio, strength, yoga, and more. Having utilized iFIT on some of the best treadmills, exercise bikes, and other cardio equipment, we rated the Carbon EL a perfect 5 out of 5 for dynamic programming. 

Value: 4.5/5

proform carbon el angle
We think the sub-$1,000 cost of the Carbon EL is worthwhile for a range of fitness levels, especially since it’s compatible with iFIT programming.

Footprint & Portability: 3.5/5

Caroline lifting the ProForm Carbon EL
Although it isn’t the lightest machine, our tester notes you can move the Carbon EL fairly easily thanks to front wheels and a convenient rear handle.

Tech Capabilities: 4.5/5

proform carbon el console
Despite its basic center console, the Carbon EL earns a near-perfect rating in this category because of its Bluetooth capabilities, iFIT integration, and quick-toggle resistance adjustments. 

Why We Like the ProForm Carbon EL

With iFIT connectivity, Bluetooth speakers, and a multi-color, high-contrast display, the ProForm Carbon EL is one of the rare budget-friendly ellipticals that offers excellent tech features. In fact, it earns a near-perfect score of 4.5 out of 5 in this category thanks to its digital capabilities. 

From a comfort standpoint, this machine also checks an important box with an accommodating 19-inch adjustable stride length. Why does this matter? Taller athletes may need a longer stride length in order to achieve a full range of motion when using an elliptical. This is another rarity amongst budget-minded elliptical machines, as we rarely see models meet our threshold of an 18- to 20-inch stride length. Accordingly, we score the ProForm Carbon EL at 4 out of 5 for adjustability and ergonomics.

“The elliptical also has fixed and moving handles, so you can adjust your grip and your workout as you go,” says our expert product tester and former professional soccer player Caroline Lubinsky

Furthermore, the Carbon EL has cushioned foot pedals that offer three adjustable positions. This can be another nice feature you might not witness with other ellipticals at this price point. Add in 18 levels of resistance and a rock-solid 10-year frame warranty, and it’s easy to see why we rate this machine at 4.5 out of 5 for value. 

With a manufacturer’s price of $999, I’m not mad about it. It won’t have a fancy touchscreen like higher-end options, but it’s a sturdy machine with Bluetooth connectivity, nonetheless.

Caroline Lubinsky, CF-L1

Alternatives

Although it’s by no means the biggest elliptical machine we’ve tested, the Carbon EL isn’t exactly the most portable profile, either. Tipping the scales at 205 pounds, we rated it a 3.5 out of 5 for its footprint and portability. Caroline used the front rollers to move the machine, but be warned that it’s a bit heavy and cumbersome during transport. 

In addition, while ProForm states that the 18 levels of magnetic resistance are “silent,” Caroline said she felt the noise was actually at a moderate level. So, if you’re looking for a whisper-quiet machine, this may not be it.

Finally, you’ll need to budget some time (and patience) to put this machine together. Caroline rated the delivery and setup at 3 out of 5, describing the process as “annoying.” 

“It’d be best completed with a friend because of the many pieces,” she told me.

If space is an issue, you could go with the ultra-compact Cubii Move. However, keep in mind that this under-desk elliptical will give you more of a mini stair stepper feel than a traditional elliptical training experience.

Testing Breakdown

Here’s how the ProForm Carbon EL fared, based on our elliptical testing methodology.

Overall Rating: 4/5

Footprint and Portability – 3.5
Delivery and Setup – 3
Durability – 3.5
Customizations – 4
Adjustability and Ergonomics – 4
Tech Capabilities – 4.5
Conveniences – 3.5
Dynamic Programming – 5
Customer Reviews – 4
Value – 4.5
Financing, Warranty, and Returns – 4
Customer Experience – 4

Vs. The Average

The ProForm Carbon EL is more affordable than the average elliptical machine and has a substantially better warranty package. However, it falls a bit short in weight capacity by 55 pounds. 

ProForm Carbon ELAverage Elliptical Machine
Price $999 $1,299
Product Weight205 lbs (in box)179 lbs
Flywheel Weight16 lbs19 lbs
Dimensions67.3” L x 24.6” W x 66.6” H62″ L x 27″ W x 67.5″ H
Weight Capacity275 lbs330 lbs
Warranty10-year frame, 1-year parts and labor3 years

You can read more in our full ProForm Carbon EL review.

Best Durable Elliptical Under $1,000: Horizon Fitness EX-59

Updated by: Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC

Sturdy Build, Unbeatable Warranty
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4
Horizon EX-59 Elliptical
300-lb weight capacity
LCD display
Tablet holder
Lifetime frame warranty
10 resistance levels
$200 off See Details
Resistance Levels
The EX-59 elliptical features 10 levels of magnetic resistance
Metrics Tracked
Calories burned, distance, heart rate, program level, speed, time, watts
Product Weight
The Horizon Fitness EX-59 has a listed product weight of 145 pounds
Incline Range
The EX-59 elliptical does not feature adjustable incline settings
Budget-Minded Folk
The EX-59’s listed MSRP is $999, but the brand routinely offers this elliptical at a discounted sales price.
Bluetooth Users
This Horizon EX-59 supports Bluetooth connectivity for streaming music or workouts through the built-in speakers.
Convenience Junkies
The EX-59 features such extras as built-in speakers, a media shelf, USB charging ports, and a water bottle holder.
Pros
Bluetooth connectivity
18-inch stride length
Textured foot pedals
10 resistance levels
Cons
Lighter flywheel
No touchscreen display
No incline options
No flywheel warranty
Dimensions
74″ L x 25″ W x 64.5″ H
Display
Backlit LCD
Weight Capacity
300 lbs
Programming
5 preset programs (Calorie, Distance, Intervals, Manual, Weight Loss)

The Horizon EX-59 is a budget-friendly elliptical with an 18-inch stride length and five preset programs to choose from. What it lacks in tech capabilities (mostly just the Bluetooth speakers) it makes up for in stability. This elliptical has a locked-down feel for a budget price-point.

What our tester says:

“It certainly is not as sturdy as a commercial model, but I was really happy with the stability for the price and size. When the resistance is turned up, it really only shakes if you’re trying to make it shake.”

At a Glance 

  • Budget-friendly elliptical with 10 available resistance levels
  • Smaller flywheel weight than the average
  • Below-average weight capacity
  • Lifetime frame warranty

Earning a rock-solid overall rating of 4 out of 5 from GGR Everything lead reviewer Lindsay Scheele, CPT, CNC, the Horizon EX-59 can be a smart investment for home gym owners looking for a long-term cardio solution. With a sturdy build that supports users up to 300 pounds, you can attack your elliptical workouts with supreme confidence. This is also one of the most comfortable machines we’ve gotten our hands (and feet) on, as Linday rates it at 4 out of 5 for adjustability and ergonomics, noting, “It certainly is not as sturdy as a commercial model, but I was really happy with the stability for the price and size.” 

Footprint & Portability: 4/5

Front transport wheels allow you to move the EX-59 without needing any assistance.

Ergonomics: 4/5

A close-up of a person's feet on the Horizon EX-59
The EX-59 earns a near-perfect score in this category thanks to its cushioned foot pedals and an industry-standard 18-inch stride length.

Value: 4/5

woman using Horizon EX-59
We feel you get your money’s worth with the EX-59 given its sufficient conveniences and solid preset programming options.

Why We Like the Horizon Fitness EX-59

Despite its budget-friendly price tag, the EX-59 provides a smooth, stable workout experience you might not expect given the sub-$1,000 price tag. “This is super smooth,” Lindsay told me. “There was no shifting when I took it to top speeds.” This workout efficiency was even more impressive given the EX-59’s lighter 14-pound flywheel. For reference, lighter flywheels can oftentimes be more erratic and loud when training at higher intensities, so we appreciate the performance aspects of this Horizon Fitness build.

The textured foot pedals also help you maintain your footing as you exercise, and an 18-inch stride length means this machine can be accommodating enough for users of just about any height. The EX-59 also has fixed and moving handlebars, opening the door to full-body workouts. 

We also appreciate that the EX-59 has a bunch of user-friendly conveniences, including built-in speakers, a USB charging port, three water bottle holders, and a media shelf for DIY streaming setups. As a result, we award it a 4 out of 5 in this category.

Although this machine is longer than the average elliptical by nearly a foot, it still earns a strong footprint and portability score of 4 out of 5. This stems from the fact that it’s easy to move with the front transport wheels and rear handle. So, if you want to move the EX-59 when you’re done breaking a sweat, you shouldn’t have any trouble. “The wheels make it doable for me to move alone,” adds Lindsay. “It felt smaller and easier than a commercial machine.”

I was surprised during testing at how incredibly sturdy this elliptical machine is, despite the smaller flywheel weight. Unless you are intentionally jostling it side to side, this is going to stay in place.

GGR Everything lead reviewer Lindsay Scheele, CPT, CNC

Alternatives

One of the few areas where the EX-59 didn’t blow us away was customizations. We rated it a 3 out of 5 since there’s only 10 levels of magnetic resistance and no adjustable incline settings. Again, that shouldn’t be a complete surprise given the price point, but it does limit its versatility when compared to other ellipticals. 

The EX-59 also falls a bit short in tech capabilities, earning a 3.5 out of 5 for the category. It has a basic display with three LED windows that show your workout metrics…and that’s about it. Luckily, there is a device holder so you can stream your favorite shows or workout apps. That said, for athletes interested in training with the latest tech features and conveniences, this is not the silhouette for such desires.

If you want a more high-tech elliptical, check out the ProForm Carbon EL. This similarly-priced machine earned a near-perfect score of 4.5 out of 5 for tech capabilities, as well as a 5-out-of-5 rating for dynamic programming.

Testing Breakdown

Here’s how the Horizon EX-59 scored based on our testing methodology. As you can see, it met our threshold for a 3 out of 5 in every examined category. 

Overall Rating: 4/5

Footprint and Portability – 4
Delivery and Setup – 4
Durability – 3.5
Customizations – 3
Adjustability and Ergonomics – 4
Tech Capabilities – 3.5
Conveniences – 4
Dynamic Programming – 4
Customer Reviews – 4.6
Value – 4
Customer Experience – 5

Vs. The Average

The Horizon Fitness EX-59 is more affordable than the average elliptical by roughly $300. That said, you do make some sacrifices in weight capacity and flywheel weight. 

Horizon Fitness EX-59Average Elliptical Machine
Price $999$1,299
Product Weight145 lbs179 lbs
Flywheel Weight14.3 lbs19 lbs
Dimensions73″ L x 24″ W x 66″ H62″ L x 27″ W x 67.5″ H
Weight Capacity300 lbs330 lbs
WarrantyLifetime frame3 years

For more insight, read our in-depth Horizon EX-59 elliptical review.

Best Compact Elliptical Under $1,000: YOSUDA EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical Machine

Updated by: Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC

Footprint-Friendly at a Fair Price
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
3.7
YOSUDA EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical Machine
Bluetooth-ready
Compact design
No touchscreen
Free shipping available
1-year warranty
4-in-1 design
Use code FEDLOVED15 at checkout for 15% off See Details
Compact Profile
The EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical Machine takes up roughly 5.84 square feet of space.
4-in-1 Design
Per YOSUDA, the EM1 features multiple modes to simulate biking, jogging, running, and backpedaling.
Sturdy Frame
Despite its smaller build, the EM1 boasts a user weight capacity of 400 pounds.
No Touchscreen
The YOSUDA EM1 features a simple LCD center console, but there is a convenient media shelf for DIY streaming setups.
Small Spaces
This YOSUDA elliptical requires just 5.84 square feet of space in order to comfortably house it within your home gym.
Larger Athletes
Despite its compact profile, this YOSUDA elliptical can support athletes up to 400 pounds.
Bluetooth Syncing
The EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical Machine can connect via Bluetooth to iConsole< Kinomap, and the FED app.
Pros
Compact design
High 400-pound weight capacity
Affordable sub-$1,000 price tag
Bluetooth compatibility with multiple workout apps
Cons
Limited one-year warranty
No integrated touchscreen
Resistance levels not listed online
Dimensions
49.63” L x 16.942” W x 26” H
Weight Capacity
400 lbs
Display
LCD console
Programming
FED app
For a compact, budget-friendly cardio machine, take a gander at the YOSUDA EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical Machine. This space-saving profile takes up just 5.84 square feet of space, and costs just under $1,000. Despite its smaller frame, though, the EM1 can support user weights up to 400 pounds.

At a Glance 

  • Unparalleled weight capacity
  • Inferior warranty compared to average elliptical
  • Feels secure and stable in use
  • Free shipping and 30-day money-back guarantee

The YOSUDA EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical Machine is available in two models: the Glide (18.91-inch stride length) or the Glide Select (20.09-inch stride length). Both machines offer a quiet workout experience thanks to a smooth magnetic drive system. Most impressively, though, the Glide boasts a 400-pound weight capacity (the Glide Select ups that to 500 pounds), helping it earn a perfect durability score of 5 out of 5. We chose this as the best compact elliptical since the EM1 occupies just 8.6 square feet, which is smaller than most coffee tables. 

Durability: 5/5

Our tester on the YOSUDA EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical Machine
A best-in-class 400-pound weight capacity helps this machine earn a perfect score here.

Value: 4/5

A close look at the pedals on a YOSUDA EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical Machine
Although it doesn’t have all the bells and whistles, this machine is well-priced for this category given its sturdy frame and accommodating stride length.

Footprint & Portability: 4/5

Our tester using the YOSUDA EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical Machine
Transport wheels make it easy to move the EM1’s compact frame around your home gym space.

Why We Like the YOSUDA EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical Machine

Measuring just over 4 feet long, roughly 2 feet wide, and a shade over 5 feet high, the EM1 definitely meets our standards for a compact elliptical machine. This makes it ideal for home gym owners with limited room. Despite the smaller-than-average dimensions, though, our expert product tester stated their training experience was comfortable, effective, and downright pleasant.

“The stride going forward feels very much like running,” she told me. “Going backwards, the stride feels smooth, but more of a glide than a run. I enjoyed the workout versatility, and I would use this machine again for fun or for elderly clients.”

The compact framing also lends itself to efficient portability. Our tester rated the EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical Machine at 4 out of 5 for the category, noting, “It’s not a heavy machine, but it’s not light either. The machine is top-heavy when you’re rolling it, but for me, it was easy to move.” 

The aptly-named Glide series also proved to be quiet during operation. Our tester said the steps and handles moved smoothly through their range of motion with limited noise, though the resistance knob does have some audible feedback when you turn it. That said, our tester appreciated the easy-to-use adjustment mechanism that made mid-workout resistance changes a breeze.

My feet felt secure on this elliptical. I did not feel like I was slipping or sliding at all.

Our expert product tester

Alternatives

Unfortunately, this YOSUDA product left us wanting more in a few key areas. First, the display is lackluster, resulting in a 3-out-of-5 tech capabilities score. “The font is easy to read, but the screen is not like an iPhone; it’s more like a GameBoy from the ‘90s,” our tester notes. “It’s a simple green and black display versus a blue light touch screen. You can only look at one thing on the screen at a time, too.” 

Perhaps the most disappointing aspect, though, is the lack of built-in programming. While other models on this list feature 10+ programs, you get nothing with the Yosuda EM1. “You are on your own just doing it for time, distance, or calories,” our tester told me. 

Luckily, the Glide connects via Bluetooth to iConsole+, Kinomap, and the FED app for some digital programming options. You also get a free year of FED premium courses; a nice bonus that adds a bit of value. Overall, though, we only rate the programming at 2.5 out of 5 since there aren’t any built-in workouts to choose from.

If you want a robust range of programming options, we highly recommend the Schwinn 430, which features 22 built-in workouts. 

Testing Breakdown

Here’s how the YOSUDA EM1 performed during testing. We were highly impressed with its durability and portability, but felt underserved by the included tech and programming.

Overall Rating: 3.7/5

Footprint and Portability – 4
Delivery and Setup – 4
Durability – 5
Customizations – 3.5
Adjustability and Ergonomics – 4
Tech Capabilities – 3
Conveniences – 3
Dynamic Programming – 2.5
Customer Reviews – 4.7
Value – 4
Financing, Warranty, and Returns – 2.5
Customer Service – 4

Vs. The Average

The YOSUDA EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical Machine is slightly cheaper than the average elliptical. While we’re impressed with its best-in-class weight capacity, we’re somewhat disappointed in its inferior one-year warranty.

YOSUDA EM1 Long-Stride Magnetic Elliptical MachineAverage Elliptical Machine
Price $999.99$1,299
Product WeightNot listed179 lbs
Flywheel Weight15.4 lbs19 lbs
Dimensions49.64” L x 24.43” W x 62.45” H62″ L x 27″ W x 67.5″ H
Weight Capacity400 lbs330 lbs
Warranty1-year warranty3 years

Best Elliptical Under $1,000 for Beginners: Sunny Health & Fitness Magnetic Elliptical Machine

Updated by: Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC

Easy to Use, Easy to Move
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4
Sunny Health & Fitness Magnetic Elliptical
Budget-friendly
24 built-in workouts
Lightweight design
3-year structural frame warranty
16 available resistance levels
Black Friday Sale: Up to 65% off See Details
Resistance Levels
The Sunny Health & Fitness Magnetic Elliptical Machine features 16 levels of adjustable resistance
Metrics Tracked
Speed, RPM, time, distance, odometer, calories, watts, heart rate, target heart rate, program, level
Product Weight
This $550 elliptical has a listed product weight of 104.8 pounds
Incline Range
This Sunny Health & Fitness Magnetic Elliptical Machine does not have adjustable incline settings
Budget-Minded Folk
This Sunny Health & Fitness Magnetic Elliptical Machine comes in at roughly $550
Varied Training Fans
Despite the lower price tag, this elliptical is loaded with 24 built-in programs for versatile training opportunities
Space Savers
The 8.78-square-foot footprint can be excellent for athletes training in smaller spaces or apartments
Pros
Easy-to-follow built-in workouts
Budget-friendly pricing
Machine is smooth and doesn’t shake
16 levels of resistance
Cons
Warranty is below the industry standard
Unclear assembly instructions
Short stride length of just 15.5 inches
Dimensions
55″ L x 23″ W x 64.5″ H
Display
Backlit LCD
Weight Capacity
330 lbs
Programming
24 preset workout programs

Pack a cardio workout in the comfort of your home with the SF-E3912 Pre-Programmed Elliptical Trainer by Sunny Health & Fitness.

What our tester says:

“While the basic LCD display isn’t the most spectacular, I do love that Sunny Health & Fitness offers these built-in programs to help change up your workout every now and again.”

At a Glance 

  • One of the most affordable ellipticals on the market
  • Below-average 13-lb flywheel weight
  • Average 330-lb weight capacity
  • 3-year frame warranty

If you are just starting to experiment with elliptical training, you may want a machine that is straightforward and accessible. Available for roughly $550, the Sunny Health & Fitness SF-E3912 Magnetic Elliptical can be ideal for beginners looking to learn the ins and outs of this cardio modality. GGR Senior Director of Content Kate Meier used this machine for several workouts and can attest to how simple it is in operation. 

“I like this Sunny Health offering for beginners because there are a whopping 24 easy-to-follow programs, so you don’t have to come up with your own beginner elliptical workout,” she told me in reference to her 4-out-of-5 programming rating. Plus, we think this is one of the best elliptical machines in terms of value, rating the SF-E3912 at 4.5 out of 5 for the category; you’re paying less than half of the average elliptical yet still get a sturdy machine with industry standard specs.

Durability: 5/5

Sunny Health and Fitness Magnetic Elliptical product photo full view
This sturdy machine can support users up to 330 pounds; a capability we more often see from more expensive ellipticals. 

Dynamic Programming: 4/5

Sunny Health and Fitness Magnetic Elliptical product photo of LCD display and handlebars
With 24 built-in workouts, you should have no trouble finding a training routine that can support your progress with regular, worthwhile challenges.

Footprint & Portability: 4/5

Sunny Health and Fitness Magnetic Elliptical product photo full view
Transport wheels make this lightweight, compact elliptical incredibly easy to move around your home gym.

Why We Like the Sunny Health & Fitness Magnetic Elliptical Machine

This Sunny Health & Fitness machine actually earned a perfect durability score despite the preconceived notion that cheap machines aren’t well-built. Unlike similarly priced ellipticals, this model can accommodate heavier users with a 330-pound weight capacity. This is especially impressive since the elliptical has a compact footprint of 55 inches long by 23 inches wide by 64.5 inches high and only weighs 104.8 pounds. Most importantly, the machine remains stable during use, according to Kate. “During my workouts, I pedaled forward and backward, and I noticed only minimal shifting while in use,” she told me. 

With an electro-magnetic system, the Sunny Magnetic Elliptical offers 16 levels of resistance that can be utilized via the center console. Beginner athletes can efficiently ease into a training session, slowly increasing workout intensities through their warm-up and working circuits. We also like that this machine offers both stationary and moving handlebars, which can offer stability for those just getting used to an elliptical as well as upper-body workout potential for when you’re ready to progress. As a result, we rate the customizations at a 4 out of 5. 

The backlit display is basic but reports the essentials like your heart rate, speed, calories burned, and distance. Also, if you need more from your monitor, the machine’s built-in media shelf can be helpful to safely incorporate your devices for additional training guidance or entertainment. Accordingly, we rate the conveniences at a 4 out of 5.  

This elliptical hits the mark for an easy-to-use machine that doesn’t have any fancy extras. It’s quiet, too—a great option for someone needing to do a full-body workout without waking up others.

Coop Mitchell, GGR founder and fitness equipment expert

Alternatives

While Sunny Health & Fitness deserves credit for building such a durable yet wallet-friendly machine, it’s fair to point out that the stride length of 15.5 inches is on the short side; taller users may not be quite as comfortable with the SF-E3912. As someone who stands 6 feet, 2 inches in height, I’d be hesitant about relying on this silhouette for regular training. As such, we rate the ergonomics at 3.5 out of 5. 

Kate relayed that her experience with putting the SF-E3912 together wasn’t exactly a breeze, either. “I personally assembled this machine, and it took about 1.5 hours,” she told me. “The instructions had complicated diagrams that combined several steps into one. I’ve put together commercial-grade ellipticals before and didn’t have this many issues.”

For a particular paint point of the setup, Kate notes that attaching the pedals requires some finesse and reworking screws to get it right. Sunny Health provides the tools necessary, but Kate found it easier to use her own Philips head screwdriver. Since you do get free shipping, we still rate the delivery and setup process at a 4 out of 5. 

Concerned about the SF-E3912’s stride length? Taller folks should look into the Horizon Fitness EX-59, which has an 18-inch stride length that should feel more comfortable if you’re vertically gifted. 

Testing Breakdown

The Sunny Health and Fitness Magnetic Elliptical Machine scored at least a 3 in all of the performance-related categories we assess. 

Overall Rating: 4/5

Footprint and Portability – 4
Delivery and Setup – 4
Durability – 5
Customizations – 4
Adjustability and Ergonomics – 3.5
Tech Capabilities – 4
Conveniences – 4
Dynamic Programming – 4
Customer Reviews – 3.9
Value – 4.5
Financing, Warranty, and Returns – 3.5
Customer Service – 3

Vs. The Average

The Sunny Health & Fitness Magnetic Elliptical is substantially cheaper than the average elliptical machine by more than 50%. Despite weighing just over 100 pounds, it boasts the same user weight capacity as machines that weigh about 75 pounds more. 

Sunny Health & Fitness Magnetic Elliptical MachineAverage Elliptical Machine
Price $549.99$1,299
Product Weight104.8 lbs179 lbs
Flywheel Weight13 lbs19 lbs
Dimensions55″ L x 23″ W x 64.5″ H62″ L x 27″ W x 67.5″ H
Weight Capacity330 lbs330 lbs
Warranty3-year frame, 180-day parts and components3 years

For more information on this budget-friendly machine, check out our Sunny Health & Fitness Magnetic Elliptical review.

Best Under-Desk Elliptical Under $1,000: Cubii Move

Updated by: Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC

Ultra-Compact At-Home Cardio
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.1
Cubii Move
Compact design
Lightweight & portable
No assembly required
1-year limited warranty
8 available resistance levels
Resistance Levels
The Cubii Move comes equipped with eight levels of toggleable resistance
Metrics Tracked
Workout time, stride count, mileage, calories burned
Product Weight
The Cubii Move has a listed product weight of just 17.6 pounds
Incline Range
The Cubii Move does not offer incline adjustment settings
Space Savers
The Cubii Move takes up less than 3 square feet and weighs less than 18 pounds for easier portability
Work from Homers
This under-desk elliptical fits neatly at your feet—perfect for getting a workout in during work hours
Quiet Seekers
You can operate the Cubii Move with little interference to phone calls or digital meetings
Pros
Lightweight
Great for under-desk pedaling
Tracks stride count, mileage, duration, and calories burned
Cons
Does not provide a full-body workout
May wobble on carpet
No Bluetooth connectivity available
Dimensions
21.7” L x 19.7” W x 9.7” H
Display
Small LCD
Weight Capacity
300 lbs
Programming
Manually-controlled workouts only

The Cubii move is a lightweight, portable exercise machine that allows you to seamlessly pedal while seated.

What our tester says:

“My grandfather routinely uses his Cubii while sitting in his easy chair and can use it without fear of falling.”

At a Glance 

  • Affordable under-desk elliptical with available free shipping
  • LCD screen that tracks time, stride count, mileage, and calories burned
  • Average 300-lb weight capacity
  • Under-desk orientation does not support upper-body exercises

We know the Cubii Move doesn’t look like an elliptical; it’s a small pedaling machine (similar to a mini stair stepper) that can be stored under your desk (just like an under-desk treadmill) or kept at your feet while you watch TV. That said, this unconventional yet ultra-compact cardio tool can be a great way to support a healthy, active lifestyle if you spend most of your day on the computer. We rate the Cubii Move’s value at 4.5 out of 5, too, since it costs about the same as a few tubs of your favorite protein powder.

Footprint & Portability: 5/5

cubii jr under desk elliptical
Weighing just 17 pounds and boasting a tiny footprint that fits neatly underneath your home office desk, the Cubii Move earns a perfect score in this category.

Durability: 3.5/5

front view cubii jr under desk elliptical
The Move offers an impressive 300-pound weight capacity, Although its plastic components may give you pause about its long-term durability.

Ergonomics: 4/5

The Cubii Move elliptical machine in motion
With six levels of resistance and a decent stride length, the Cubii Move should feel comfortable for most users. 

Why We Like the Cubii Move

We’re BIG fans of compact exercise equipment, and the Cubii Move certainly qualifies as that. Measuring just under 2 feet long, 19.7 inches wide, and 9.7 inches high, this under-desk cardio machine takes up as much room as a few pairs of dumbbells. Plus, it only tips the scales at 17 pounds, meaning you can easily reposition it for that picture perfect setup. 

“There aren’t any wheels on it, but it’s light enough for most people to handle and move around in your home or office,” our tester told me, rating the Move a 5 out of 5 for footprint and portability. 

Of course, you shouldn’t expect the same type of workout experience from an under-desk model as a traditional, full-sized machine. After all, there are no handlebars for upper-body engagement. Still, our product tester was impressed with how comfortable the Cubii Move is to use, rating the adjustability and ergonomics at 4 out of 5. 

“The pedaling is smooth and feels comfortable—worth while for under-desk elliptical training,” our tester told me.

Although the Cubii Move does not offer incline adjustment settings, it does have six levels of toggleable resistance. Remember, you’re not relying on this for high-intensity training; rather, this is a device you can utilize during work hours without causing any interference to your scheduled phone calls, video conferences, or digital meetings. 

I also appreciate the quiet nature of its operation; it won’t disrupt anyone during meetings, digital or otherwise.

Ben Emminger, NASM-CNC, NASM-CSNC, GGR Editor

Alternatives

Inherently limited in its capabilities, it’s still fair to want a bit more from the Cubii Move in terms of customizations. Six levels of resistance sounds good, in theory, but in practice, it left us a bit underwhelmed, resulting in a 3-out-of-5 rating for the category. Our tester had to leave it set on the highest settings, noting, “I hardly felt any difference between the levels.” 

Although this ultra-budget, under-desk elliptical has a 300-pound weight capacity, we wouldn’t call it the most durable machine. The Cubii Move features tons of plastic parts, so you run the risk of cracking the plastic if you’re not mindful of how you handle it during transport and training. We still give it a 3.5 out of 5 for durability, but it’s definitely something to be aware of. 

If you prefer a standard elliptical machine yet still need a compact profile for smaller spaces, we recommend the Sunny Health and Fitness Magnetic Elliptical, which earned a 4 out of 5 for footprint and portability. 

Testing Breakdown

The Cubii Move earned solid scores across the board, though we acknowledge it’s not an apples-to-apples comparison with the other entries on our list of the best ellipticals under $1,000.

Editor’s Note: Since this is an under-desk elliptical, we did not factor in conveniences or dynamic programming into our overall rating.

Overall Rating: 4.1/5

Footprint and Portability – 5
Delivery and Setup – 5
Durability – 3.5
Customizations – 3
Adjustability and Ergonomics – 4
Tech Capabilities – 3.5
Customer Reviews – 4.4
Value – 4.5
Customer Experience – 4

Vs. The Average

To put this into proper perspective, we compared the Cubii Move to your typical under-desk elliptical machine. As you can see, it’s on par or exceeds the averages in every category.

Cubii MoveAverage Under-Desk Elliptical Machine
Price $160$197
Product Weight17.6 lbs26.2 lbs
Dimensions21.7″ L x 19.7″ W x 9.7″ H23” D x 17” W x 12.6” H
Weight Capacity300 lbs300 lbs
Warranty1 year1 year

Best Elliptical Under $1,000 With Programming: Schwinn 430 Elliptical

Updated by: Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC

Streamlined Display with 20+ Built-In Workouts
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
3.6
Schwinn 430 Elliptical
20” stride length
DualTrack LCD screen
Easy assembly
Standard shipping rates apply
10-year frame warranty
20 resistance levels
Varied Resistance
According to the brand, the Schwinn 430 features 20 levels of computer-controlled resistance.
Lighter Flywheel
This elliptical features a 13.2-pound flywheel, which can be noisy when training at higher intensities.
Built-In Workouts
The Schwinn 430 Elliptical is pre-loaded with 22 built-in workouts for a range of training challenges.
No Touchscreen
The Schwinn 430 boasts an LCD center console and there are no means for DIY streaming via Bluetooth.
Budget Buyers
You can purchase the Schwinn 430 Elliptical for roughly $999.
Minimalists
This simple Schwinn profile features a basic LCD console with easy-to-read toggles and no subscription requirement.
Athletes
The 430 Elliptical comes pre-loaded with 22 built-in workouts and 20 levels of computer-controlled resistance.
Pros
22 preset workout programs
20 available resistance levels
Budget-friendly with a sub-$1,000 MSRP
Lightweight frame of 168.7 pounds
Cons
No Bluetooth capabilities
Lighter 13.2-pound flywheel can be noisy in operation
Dimensions
70.1″ L x 28.2″ W x 63.2″ H
Weight Capacity
300 lbs
Display
DualTrack 2 LCD screen system
Programming
22 preset programs
For those seeking a simple yet effective elliptical machine, the Schwinn 430 may be worth your consideration. This minimalistic cardio machine employs an LCD display for keeping tabs on key workout metrics, and the console comes equipped with 22 preset modules to choose from. Additionally, the Schwinn 430 Elliptical does not require a subscription to a compatible app service for optimal use.

At a Glance 

  • Streamlined console with multiple screens
  • 20 levels of computer-controlled resistance
  • Slightly below-average weight capacity
  • Above-average warranty

It’s nice to simply step onto a cardio machine, press a button, and get right into a good workout. That’s precisely what you can do on the Schwinn 430, which offers a whopping 22 built-in programs catering to a range of training interests! These modules include beginner- and advanced-level options for workouts such as heart rate control, fitness tests, and customized sessions. This results in an easy score of 5 out of 5 for dynamic programming, as you can use the 430 for intense elliptical workouts for runners or more casual, steady-state sessions.

Editor’s Note: We have not tested the 430 elliptical in our facilities, but we have been able to test the Schwinn 470—a since-discontinued model that should give you a good feel of what to expect from the budget-friendly 430.

Customizations: 4/5

feet on pedals of schwinn 470 elliptical
You can choose from 20 resistance levels with the Schwinn 430, so you can continually challenge yourself with each new workout session. (Pictured is the 470 Elliptical we tested)

Value: 4/5

incline from underneath on schwinn 470 elliptical
You get a great combination of conveniences and customizations for less than $1,000 with this Schwinn cardio machine. (Pictured is the 470 Elliptical we tested)

Dynamic Programming: 5/5

console of schwinn 470 ellitpical
With 22 built-in workout programs, the Schwinn 430 gives you a ton of training flexibility. (Pictured is the 470 Elliptical we tested)

Why We Like the Schwinn 430 Elliptical

One of the downsides with the sub-$1,000 price range is that it limits your ability to stream workouts through an app. Luckily, the Schwinn 430 stands apart from other similarly priced ellipticals by offering a whopping 22 built-in workout programs. Having this library conveniently at your fingertips can be great for promoting regular challenges and workout progression without the need for a secondary subscription. As a result, we rate it a rock-solid 4 out of 5 for value. 

In addition to being packed with workouts, the 430 is loaded with features, as well. You’ll find a USB port, media shelf, water bottle holder, a cooling fan, dual speakers, and even an input for MP3 devices. We had no complaints regarding similar conveniences on the Schwinn 470 during our testing. We also appreciate the two DualTrack LCD displays that allow you to view programs and goal tracking. Overall, we rate the conveniences at a 3.5 out of 5. 

Both the 470 that we tested and the 430 have the same type of magnetic resistance, as well as a 20-inch stride length (which can be a big plus for taller users). In testing, we found the 470 to be extremely quiet, and we can speculate that with similar specs, the 430 will be just as silent. There are 20 levels of resistance on the 430, and it is computer controlled; in other words, you can simply press buttons to change the resistance. 

Having the ability to choose from a range of workouts can be a welcomed perk, especially at this price point. The large library essentially eliminates the need for a monthly workout app membership, which helps keep the price down.

Ben Emminger, NASM-CNC, NASM-CSNC

Alternatives

Be warned: This is not a compact machine in the least bit. Conversely, it’s rather large measuring nearly 6 feet long and more than 2 feet wide, meaning you’ll need sufficient space to fit this in your home gym or office; make sure to measure ahead of time. Plus, the Schwinn 430 weighs nearly 170 pounds, leading to a footprint and portability score of 3.5 out of 5. 

There are two other callouts worth mentioning. First, the 430 lacks Bluetooth connectivity, which can be a hindrance if you like to sync your fitness tracker with your cardio machine for effective data monitoring. Secondly, while many companies offer free shipping, that’s not the case with Schwinn. Be prepared to pay $199 for shipping, which elevates the overall investment total to over the $1,000 threshold. However, you can still find the 430 on other retailers that may offer free shipping, so check all your options before you make a final decision.

If you’re concerned about the lack of connectivity, look into the ProForm Carbon EL, which has Bluetooth speakers for an enhanced workout experience.

Testing Breakdown

Here’s how the Schwinn 430 Elliptical measured up, based on our testing protocols. 

Overall Rating: 3.6/5

Footprint and Portability – 3.5
Delivery and Setup – 3
Durability – 3
Customizations – 4
Adjustability and Ergonomics – 3
Tech Capabilities – 3.5
Conveniences – 3.5
Dynamic Programming – 5
Customer Reviews – 4.5
Value – 4
Financing, Warranty, and Returns – 4
Customer Service – 3

Vs. The Average

The Schwinn 430 Elliptical is about $300 cheaper than the average elliptical. We appreciate the superior warranty coverage but would be remiss without pointing out that the flywheel is much lighter than the average machine, which can lead to louder mid-workout performances. 

Schwinn 430 EllipticalAverage Elliptical Machine
Price $999$1,299
Product Weight168.7 lbs179 lbs
Flywheel Weight13.2 lbs19 lbs
Dimensions70.1” L x 28.2” W x 63.2” H62″ L x 27″ W x 67.5″ H
Weight Capacity300 lbs330 lbs
Warranty10-year frame, 2-year mechanical parts, 1-year electronics, 90-day labor3 years

Other Ellipticals We Researched and Tested

In our quest to find the best ellipticals under $1,000, we tested and researched dozens of models. Although some made a strong case for inclusion, the following machines came up just short of the final cut. 

  • Sole E25: We really like the Sole E25, but the price has risen to about $1,300, which puts it just outside the price range for our purposes. We still think it has great value, though, so if you can extend your budget a bit, it’s definitely worth checking out.
  • ProForm Hybrid Trainer: This hybrid provides both a recumbent bicycle and elliptical option for your training. I’m always a fan of having more versatility on a workout machine. However, what stood out most about this bike/elliptical hybrid is that it offers an adjustable screen with interactive programming via iFIT.
  • Exerpeutic Elliptical: Despite the price range, the elliptical is pretty sturdy. However, our testers found it to be very loud in operation, which may be a turn-off for those training around other homedwellers.
  • Niceday Elliptical: This exceptionally quiet and affordable elliptical has a durable build with a weight capacity of 400 pounds, though we found the handles to be a little wobbly during more intense cardio sessions.

How We Picked and Tested The Best Ellipticals Under $1,000

The GGR squad uses a detailed testing methodology to determine which ellipticals deserve recognition and which ones you can afford to pass on. For this roundup, we first made sure each machine met our threshold for a sub-$1,000 price point. From there, we rated and reviewed as many profiles as possible, taking note of performances in key categories including:

person using schwinn 470 elliptical
Our tester on a Schwinn elliptical in the GGR testing center.

Footprint and Portability

Can you easily move the machine from room to room? Does the elliptical have a folding mechanism that allows you to reduce its footprint when not in use? We also factor in features like transport wheels and handles that can increase the ease of portability. We give higher scores to ellipticals with compact footprints and lightweight designs that make it easy for one person to maneuver the machine independently within their workout space. 

Delivery and Setup

We take note of how difficult (or easy) it is to get the elliptical up and running. Does the manufacturer provide clear instructions? Were there any major stumbling blocks that made the assembly process particularly challenging? Machines that arrive with easy-to-follow instructions, clearly labeled pieces, and all the tools you need earn a minimum score of 3 out of 5.

Durability

To meet our threshold for a durability score of 3 out of 5, an elliptical must have a user weight capacity of at least 300 pounds (the industry standard). We also require that it remains stable during use with no instances of shaking or wobbles, even at higher resistances.

We also look at the flywheel weight, with the best ellipticals having a 16- to 20-pound flywheel. Why does this matter? Lighter flywheels can be prone to louder operations and may break down quicker given the more revolutions needed to maintain specific needs.  

Customizations

How many resistance levels does the machine have? Is it easy to change the settings mid-workout? To earn a 3 or higher, the elliptical must have a minimum of 12 resistance levels to support gradual performance growth and development. We award higher scores to machines that offer decline and incline training, as well as those that allow you to pedal in both directions.

Adjustability and Ergonomics

Our adjustability and ergonomics score reflects how comfortable an elliptical is during use. To earn a 3 out of 5 or higher, an elliptical should have both fixed and moving handlebars, oversized pedals that can fit most feet, a stride length between 18 to 20 inches, and soft grips on the aforementioned handles. 

Furthermore, some of the best ellipticals with incline settings allow you to adjust the angle for a steeper climb, which can provide an even greater challenge while increasing the adjustability score. 

Tech Capabilities

Does the machine have tech features like Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connectivity, heart rate sensors, and/or a robust monitor for workout tracking? Meanwhile, does the technology work as expected, or are there glitches that cause more headaches than it’s worth? We award higher scores to ellipticals that include USB chargers, speakers, and touchscreen displays that operate as intended with no instances of glitching or lagging.

Conveniences

We look for basic user-friendly features like a water bottle holder, a safety stop mechanism, and a media shelf where you can house your phone or tablet to watch your favorite shows or participate in on-demand classes. Bonus points go to elliptical machines with more luxe offerings, such as built-in cooling fans, additional safety features, or even an extra water bottle holder. 

Dynamic Programming

Ellipticals that have at least a handful of built-in workout programs meet our standard for a 3 out of 5. We give higher scores for more robust workout libraries, or machines that offer virtual programming or an online community where you can connect with fellow fitness enthusiasts.

Value

Is the machine priced fairly based on the features? How does it compare to similar models from other manufacturers? We care about getting the best bang for your buck, especially if you’re trying to stick to spending less than $1,000. To earn a 3 or higher, an elliptical should be priced competitively and offer sufficient features to make it a worthwhile long-term investment. 

Customer Experience

This encompasses everything from the financing options to the warranty and return policies. The average elliptical includes a three-year warranty, but we tend to favor those with lengthier policies. To get a perfect score, the machine must come with a lifetime frame warranty, at least a 30-day return policy, and multiple financing options. 

Customer Reviews

We take a look at what actual customers have to say about a particular profile. Whether it’s Amazon, the official company website, or another reputable site, we look at the average rating and dive into customer reviews for detailed feedback. 

Benefits of Ellipticals

Elliptical training can be a fantastic way to improve your overall health and fitness, especially since it’s a low-impact activity. Here’s a quick overview of some of the ways you can benefit from this popular cardio machine. 

A woman working out using the Yosuda Elliptical what muscles does an elliptical work
Our tester analyzing her workout metrics on a YOSUDA elliptical.

Low-Impact Exercise

According to a 2021 study1, elliptical training can be beneficial since it takes less of a toll on your joints than other forms of cardiovascular exercise while promoting a better quality of life. Because your feet stay in constant contact with the pedals, ellipticals significantly reduce stress on your joints compared to high-impact activities like running or jumping. This makes them an excellent option for older adults, people with knee, hip, or ankle issues, as well as those recovering from injury.

GGR chief medical advisor Dr. Raj Dasgupta, MD, FACP, FCCP, FAASM offers a gentle reminder that intensity isn’t always the driving factor. 

“Remember, simple routines such as a daily walk can also help you live a healthier life,” he explains. “

Can Boost Your Mood

Longtime GGR contributor Christopher Mohr, PhD, RD, supports elliptical training, even if you aren’t necessarily going pedal to the metal like you might during a sprint workout. After all, the mental benefits can be just as valuable as the physical rewards.  

“Low-intensity exercise can be just as beneficial as high-intensity exercise,” he explains. “Low-intensity activities encourage the release of endorphins and promote relaxation for better sleep, which can help improve your overall mood.”

RELATED: Exercise And Mental Health

Can Assist With Weight Loss

Just how much can you accomplish during an elliptical session? According to Harvard Health Publishing2, a 185-pound athlete can burn more calories during a 30-minute elliptical workout than the same time spent on a stationary rowing machine at a moderate pace. In other words: This machine can give you a better bang for your calorie-burning buck. 

Beyond the calorie-burning and mental health benefits, elliptical training can be an effective way to help achieve your body recomposition goals. “Regular physical activity, like using an elliptical several days a week, can aid in managing and maintaining a healthy body fat percentage,” Mohr adds. “It does this by burning calories, which can help create a calorie deficit when combined with a nutritious diet.”

Of course, you shouldn’t shy away from incorporating strength training into your routine, too. 

“This mix also boosts your metabolism and supports long-term weight loss,” Dasgupta explains.

While we touched upon a few of the reasons to hop on one of these machines, you can get a complete breakdown in our comprehensive elliptical benefits guide

Buying Guide: What to Look For In the Best Ellipticals

We have a comprehensive elliptical buying guide, but here are a few things to primarily focus on if you’re in the market for a budget-friendly machine to help you meet your fitness goals:

A close look at the handle for moving and storing a Yosuda Dolphin Elliptical
Our tester moving an elliptical machine into position for a workout.

Footprint

If you have limited space in your home, you’ll want a machine that is easy to move or, at least, a foldable profile that can shrink its footprint in-between workouts. Thankfully, budget ellipticals often come with smaller overall dimensions than other machines. 

Keep in mind, though, that this usually means a shorter stride, which can be uncomfortable for taller users. Be sure to read the product descriptions for actual measurements, and take some time to measure your available space; you may find that your actual floor plan is smaller (or larger) than previously thought.

Incline and Resistance Levels

One area where more affordable ellipticals often make sacrifices is with resistance levels. You might find fewer options on these machines, which can limit how intense your workouts are in practice. The same goes for incline: In order to offer incline levels, a machine would need a powerful motor to facilitate those changes, and that would mean a higher price tag. 

Incline levels are a bonus feature that you absolutely should take advantage of, if available. A 2021 study3 found that pedaling at an incline is beneficial because it can change your lower-body mechanics and activate different muscle groups compared to level-ground pedaling. Be aware, however, that this feature may result in more maintenance needs, since it requires a separate motor in the machine’s composition.

Durability

Will the elliptical be able to support your weight? Does it shake while in use? You can glean weight capacity from product specs, but understanding how sturdy it is might be difficult to do if you don’t have access to the machine. We recommend reading any available online customer reviews for additional information on durability, as these testimonials can be helpful in determining how long a machine can last when exposed to regular wear and tear.

Technology

Maybe you don’t mind a simple monitor that records the basics (calories burned, distance, speed, heart rate, etc.). However, many people today desire more advanced interactive fitness programs built into the machine’s interface. 

Expect steeper prices as tech features become more advanced, but some models are equipped to offer quality preset programming and interactive training at an affordable rate. 

Furthermore, when shopping on a budget, DIY solutions such as incorporating external devices for viewing can be a great solution before investing in higher-end ellipticals. And while not standard, many machines in this price range offer USB and Bluetooth technology.

FAQs About the Best Ellipticals Under $1,000

How much should I spend on an elliptical?

You can find many high-quality ellipticals for around the $1,000 price point, including the ProForm Carbon EL. The average elliptical machine costs roughly $1,299, so if you go far beyond that point, make sure you’re getting sufficient value with features like a touchscreen display, built-in programming, and adjustable resistance levels. 

Is a treadmill better than an elliptical machine?

A treadmill isn’t necessarily better than an elliptical, as both profiles offer a way to improve your cardiovascular fitness. However, a treadmill may be better suited for runners or competitive athletes who want to train for their specific sport or activity. An elliptical can be an ideal pick for a low-impact workout that won’t take as much of a toll on your joints. 

Which elliptical brand is best?

There are several standout elliptical manufacturers that have impressed our team, including ProForm, Sole, NordicTrack, Bowflex, and Horizon Fitness. Of course, though, the best elliptical for your home gym is going to depend on more personal factors such as your training interests, available space, desired conveniences, and budget.

References

  1. Bosch, A. N., Flanagan, K. C., Eken, M. M., Withers, A., Burger, J., & Lamberts, R. P. (2021). Physiological and Metabolic Responses to Exercise on Treadmill, Elliptical Trainer, and Stepper: Practical Implications for Training. International journal of sport nutrition and exercise metabolism, 31(2), 135–142. https://doi.org/10.1123/ijsnem.2020-0155
  2. Harvard Health Publishing. (2021, March 8). Calories burned in 30 minutes for people of three different weights. Harvard Health. https://www.health.harvard.edu/diet-and-weight-loss/calories-burned-in-30-minutes-for-people-of-three-different-weights
  3. Hummer, E. T., Murphy, E. N., Suprak, D. N., Brilla, L. R., & San Juan, J. G. (2021). Movement direction impacts knee joint kinematics during elliptical exercise at varying incline angles. The Knee, 29, 201–207. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.knee.2021.02.008
]]>
Best High-Protein Meal Delivery (2026): 8 Options That Can Help You Build Muscle And Stay Full https://www.garagegymreviews.com/high-protein-meal-delivery Thu, 15 Jan 2026 16:50:02 +0000 https://www.garagegymreviews.com/?p=165409 The best high-protein meal delivery services can help you get more protein, which is one of the best things you can do for your body composition1 (when combined with exercise). These services offer prepared meals or pre-portioned meal kits that have at least 25 to 40 grams of protein per serving, which is the recommended amount per meal to maximize muscle protein synthesis (following resistance training)2, according to a 2019 article in Sports Medicine and backed by registered dietitian and GGR contributor Perry Nix, RD, LD.

To help you narrow down your options and find the best high-protein meal delivery for your diet plan, we tested more than 60 of the best meal delivery services from some of the category’s most popular providers. We rated each kit and service in accordance with our GGR testing methodology, scoring factors such as:

  • Taste: Based on our testers’ experiences, as well as the general consensus of online customer reviews, a 3-out-of-5 score is awarded to meal services that are just fine, with top scores going to subscriptions with plate after plate of delectable flavors.
  • Portion Size: We look for decent portion sizes, awarding a 3 out of 5 to meals with OK portions, although it may leave you hungry after a couple hours.
  • Ingredient Quality: We favor fresh, high-quality ingredients in our testing, awarding meal kits that prioritize top-notch goods with a 4 out of 5 or higher.
  • Ease of Preparation: This will vary between prepared meals and meal kits, but a 3 out of 5 is earned for meals that are fairly simple to whip up, requiring no more than 20 minutes to prepare. Prepared meals earn top scores since they’re simply reheated for a few minutes and don’t require any cleanup.
  • Price Per Serving: High-protein meal deliveries can be pricier than other options, but a 3 out of 5 goes to a cost of about $12 per serving.

Finally, we asked Dr. Jennie Stanford, who holds a degree in nutrition and dietetics, to medically review this content for accuracy and updated studies. To date, we’ve helped over 63,000 users connect with their ideal supplement or meal service, and we’re certain the following details can help you, as well.

Medical disclaimer: This article is intended for educational and informational purposes only. It is not intended as a substitute for medical advice. For health advice, contact a licensed healthcare provider.

GGR Gold Pick — Best High-Protein Meal Delivery

Our top pick for the best high-protein meal delivery goes to Home Chef, which earned 4.2 stars out of 5, overall. Along with having 30 grams of protein per serving (or more, in some cases), our testers were largely impressed by the flavor and variety of meals available.

Best High-Protein Meal Delivery

Current Top Deals

Upgrade your protein game with big savings from top meal delivery services. Browse the deals below to find one that suits your goals and budget.

Latest Updates

In January 2026, our team of certified nutrition coaches, elite athletes, and personal trainers agreed on crowning Home Chef as our best high-protein meal delivery overall. This meal delivery service offers both meal kits and prepared meals, which tasted great and were portioned well in our testing, all at a great price.

Need help finding the right meal delivery?

Based on your answers, we’ve carefully selected the best products tailored to your needs.

Best High-Protein Meal Delivery Overall: Home Chef

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Excellent Taste and Portions
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.2
Home Chef
Home Chef
Buget-friendly
Flexible
Meal kit or prepared
Pause or cancel subscription at any time
Ships to 98% of the United States
Option to skip a delivery
Use code GARAGEGYM15FM for 15 Free Meals + Free Shipping on First Box See Details
Meal Types
Meal kits, pre-made meals, or grill-ready ingredients
Menu Options
Up to 30 meals to choose from weekly
Price Range
Between $10-$12.06 per meal
Vegetarian
Options for vegetarian dieters
Flexibility
You can choose from meal kits, fully prepared meals or grill-ready ingredients
Family-friendly
Home Chef has recipes that can accommodate up to six people, making it ideal for families
Pros of Home Chef
Menu changes weekly to prevent food boredom
Options for meal kits or pre-made meals
Can skip a week if you don’t need a delivery
Reasonably priced
Can accommodate larger groups and families (many meal delivery services cap out at four servings per recipe)
Cons of Home Chef
Doesn’t accommodate a lot of dietary restrictions
Options can be limited if you’re on a specific diet
Requires a subscription (that you can skip or cancel, but you have to remember)
Meal Type
Prepared or meal kit
Meals Per Week
Up to 6
Diet Types
Vegetarian, low-carb
Price Per Serving
Between $10-$12.06

Home Chef is a meal delivery service that gives you options between meal kits, heat-and-eat meals, and grill-ready selections. It does require a subscription, but you can cancel any time or skip a week if you don’t want a shipment. Our testers appreciate the high-quality ingredients, easy ordering process, and variety of options.

At a Glance 

  • Offers both prepared meals and meal kits
  • Starts at budget-friendly pricing
  • Average amount of meals per week
  • Below-average number of available meal plans

Home Chef is our best overall pick for high-protein meals for many reasons, but the one that impresses us most is the flavor, which we gave a perfect 5-out-of-5 score. With fresh ingredients and chef-crafted recipes, dishes are designed to be portioned well and satisfying. Some meals are packed with 30 grams of protein or more, making this meal kit service the ideal choice for those who want nutritious meals that taste just as good as they are good for you.

Taste: 5/5

Honey butter pork chops from the Home Chef meal delivery service.
Our testers love the flavor of each meal and even save recipe cards so that they can make them on their own later on.

Variety: 5/5

Ingredients for the Honey Butter Pork Chop recipe from the Home Chef meal delivery service.
Our testers appreciate that meals rotate weekly with plenty of delicious options to choose from.

Ease of Prep: 2/5

Cooking honey butter pork chops from the Home Chef meal delivery service.
It’ll ultimately depend on the meal itself, but most meals will require substantial clean-up, according to our tester.

Why We Like Home Chef

Emily Chidester, a friend of Garage Gym Reviews who has been using Home Chef for nearly two years, praised the consistently tasty flavors, though she told me that the deliciousness of each dish will depend on your personal cooking skills. “Many of the meals have wonderful sauces that just make the food absolutely perfect,” she told me. “My family has learned a lot about cooking just from making different recipes.”

Home Chef has a rotating menu of meals with some reaching 30 to 40 grams of protein per serving. The service also offers a variety of calorie- and carb-conscious meals that can be tailored to your dietary preferences. You can even swap in leaner meats on some recipes, such as chicken in place of sausage. Plus, as registered dietitian Perry Nix points out, cooking your own meals, even those from a meal kit, has been linked to improved diet quality.

“Home Chef is a good option for those wanting to learn how to build balanced meals and acquire new cooking skills,” Nix says. “Even if you only use the meal kits short-term, you can mimic the recipes in the future by using store-bought ingredients.”

Emily also rates Home Chef’s ordering process at 5 out of 5. “I get email reminders every week to go select my meals,” she says. “Home Chef automatically selects meals for you based on your stated preferences and the types of meals you’ve selected in the past, but you can edit them if you want.”

I’m obsessed. I’ve used Home Chef for about six months, getting a few meals each week. In that time, there’s only been a couple of meals that I wasn’t crazy about. I even started a binder where I keep recipes of the meals I love.

Kate Meier, NASM-CPT, USAW-L1, CF-L1, GGR Senior Director of Content

Alternatives

The ease of preparation can depend on the recipe in question, though Emily gave the service a 2 out of 5 for the category, mostly because it requires a good bit of cleanup post-dining. The meal kits can take anywhere from 20 to 40 minutes, but there are ‘Express’ meals that can be ready in 15 minutes or less, as well as ‘Oven-Ready’ meals that you just need to heat and eat.

Emily also let me know that Home Chef has made some mistakes before with regards to her delivered orders, typically in the form of sending her the wrong meal kits or ingredients. Still, in those moments, customer service was very receptive and helpful, applying credits to her account for the next delivery. Because of this, the packaging and shipping earns a 3.5 out of 5, while customer service gets a solid 5-out-of-5 score.

We love Home Chef, but if you prefer not to cook or clean after eating, consider a company like Tempo Meals, which focuses on pre-made meals.

Testing Breakdown

In short, Home Chef is a solid meal kit service we recommend, although the varying prep time impacted its overall score a bit.

Overall Rating: 4.2/5

Price Per Serving – 4.5
Ordering Flexibility – 5
Taste – 5
Ease of Preparation – 2
Portion Size – 5
Ingredient Quality – 4
Variety – 5
Meal Plans and Customization – 4
Access to Nutritional Information – 4
Packaging and Shipping – 3.5
Sustainability Efforts – 4
Customer Service – 5
Customer Reviews – 3.9

Vs. The Average

With prices starting below $8, Home Chef is certainly a less expensive meal service when compared to the average meal delivery. Plus, it offers meal kits and prepared meals—a rare sense of variety for the category.

Home ChefAverage Meal Delivery
Price Per MealStarts at $7.99$12.37
TypePrepared meals and meal kitsPrepared meals
Meals Per WeekUp to 66-8
Servings Per Meal1 (prepared meal), 2 (meal kits)1 (prepared meal), 2 (meal kits)
Delivery AreaContiguous U.S.Contiguous U.S.
Diets/Dietary RestrictionsVegetarian, Low-CarbPlans vary, but usually 3 options

Read our Home Chef review for more information.

Best High-Protein Meal Delivery for Athletes: Tempo Meals

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Great Taste and Perfect Portion Size
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4
Home Chef
Tempo Meals by Home Chef
Singles
Prepared
High-protein
No vegetarian or vegan options
Delivers to 98% of the United States
Discount program for eligible workers
Meal Options
20 new recipes each week
Shelf Life
Meals have a refrigerated shelf-life of 3-10 days upon delivery
Price
$10.98-$15.98 per serving, depending on number of meals
Meals per Week
4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, or 16+
Great Taste
Our tester rated Tempo a 4.5 out of 5 for taste, noting “everything is well-seasoned”
Variety
Our testers rated Tempo a perfect 5 out of 5 for variety
Pros of Tempo
20 new recipes each week
Skip or cancel any week
Nutrition and allergen information provided for each meal
Options to sign up for just you or multiple people in household
Great taste
Cons of Tempo
Does not deliver to entire US- check zip code during sign up process
Requires a weekly subscription
No goal-oriented meal plans
Meal Type
Prepared
Meals Per Week
6 to 16+
Diet Types
High-protein, calorie-conscious, and fiber-rich
Price Per Meal
Starts at $10.98

Tempo by Home Chef is a microwavable meal subscription service. Every week you will get meals delivered to your door unless you remember to skip by the Friday before. The meals are designed by chefs with certain goals in mind, like protein packed or fiber rich, but you will have to select individual meals. There aren’t specific plans like weight loss or weight gain.

At a Glance

  • Prepared meal delivery service with high-protein options
  • Meals are within standard price range
  • Can order 16 or more meals per week, well above the norm
  • Average number of meal plans available

It’s no secret that adequate protein intake is one key component of building muscle. Amino acids—the building blocks of proteins—are crucial for muscle synthesis and repair3. With meals that contain close to 30 grams of protein, Tempo by Home Chef is our top pick for a high-protein meal delivery service for athletes. Tempo is also the official meal delivery of the CrossFit Games, further justifying its effectiveness for sport-minded individuals.

Nutrition and supplements expert Bob Iafelice, MS, RDN, LDN, approves of this service, which we rate at 4 out of 5 overall. “Protein is the core of a meal, and Tempo by Home Chef does it right by placing a large emphasis on protein,” he tells me. “The meals are well-balanced, too, with plenty of veggies.” 

Ease of Prep: 5/5

A stack of Tempo meals in a freezer
Tempo Meals are pre-made, meaning all they need for prep is to be reheated in the microwave for a few minutes.

Plans & Customizations: 2/5

An assortment of meals from Tempo by Home Chef in a box
There’s not a lot of meals catered to specific dietary restrictions—like vegetarian or pescatarian—although there’s still a good variety of available options.

Taste: 4.5/5

A meal from Tempo after being heated
Our tester enjoyed the meals from Tempo, stating they were packed with plenty of flavor, spice, and seasonings.

Why We Like Tempo Meals

Former GGR editorial member and certified personal trainer Anthony O’Reilly rated the meals at a solid 4.5 out of 5 for taste. “I was surprised by how much I liked these. There was a ton of flavor, and you can tell everything is well-seasoned,” he says.

Anthony was also impressed with the ingredient quality, scoring the meals at 4 out of 5 for the category. “Everything seems fresh, but the ingredients aren’t organic,” Anthony explained to me. “The meals are a lot better than other prepared meal services I’ve tried, though.” 

RELATED: Best Meat Subscription Boxes

Tempo by Home Chef offers a broad variety of meals, and you can even choose certain foods you’d like to avoid during signup (no cluttered menus, hooray!). Anthony was also a fan of the easy preparation process and rated it at 5 out of 5. The simple prep and lack of cleanup can be great for athletes (or anyone) that are constantly on the move, too.

All you have to do is throw the meals in the microwave. The process couldn’t be simpler, and all of the instructions are clearly written on each package.

Anthony O’Reilly, CPT, CNC

Alternatives

There’s no easy way to select meals that fit a specific dietary need when choosing your preferences—like if you need to eat gluten-free, for example. You’ll have to pay close attention to the ingredients when choosing your weekly servings if you have a food allergy, as the nutrition information doesn’t specify allergens. Because of this, Tempo gets a 2 out of 5 on meal plans and customizations.

Another callout is the price per meal, which Anthony rated at 3 out of 5. Costs can range from around $11 to $13.50, depending on how many meals you order. You can choose up to 16 or more meals each week, and the price per meal decreases the more you order. Still, the cost can quickly add up, and Anthony didn’t think the quality quite matched the pricing.

If you want something a little more affordable, you may want to look into services that provide meal kits you assemble yourself, like Home Chef.

Testing Breakdown

Aside from the lack of diet-specific meal plans, Tempo Meals is a solid (albeit pricey) meal delivery service that scored quite well in our testing.

Overall Rating: 4/5

Price Per Serving – 3
Ordering Flexibility – 4
Taste – 4.5
Ease of Preparation – 5
Portion Size – 5
Ingredient Quality – 4
Variety – 5
Meal Plans and Customization – 2
Access to Nutritional Information – 5
Packaging and Shipping – 5
Sustainability Efforts – 1
Customer Service – 5
Customer Reviews – 3.2

Vs. The Average

Prices vary depending on the number of meals you order each week, but the price range falls around the average price per meal when compared to typical costs. Also, Tempo Meals offers four different meal plans—slightly over the usual three options provided by many meal deliveries—although they aren’t necessarily diet-specific. Those with restrictions or allergies will still need to pay close attention to the meals they order.

Tempo MealsAverage Meal Delivery
Price Per Meal$10.98-$15.98$12.37
TypePrepared mealsPrepared meals
Meals Per Week4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, or 16+6-8
Servings Per Meal11 (prepared meal), 2 (meal kits)
Delivery Area98% of U.S.Contiguous U.S.
Diets/Dietary RestrictionsHigh-protein, Calorie-Conscious, GLP-1 Balanced, and Fiber-RichPlans vary, but usually 3 options

Most Convenient High-Protein Meal Delivery: Factor Meals

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Easy Prep and Good Variety
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4
Factor
Factor Meals
Keto
Prepared
Low-carb
First box ships free
Vegan and vegetarian options
Pause or cancel at any time
Up to $135 off on your first 5 boxes + free breakfast See Details
Meal Types
6 options, including Keto, Calorie Smart, Vegetarian, and Protein Plus
Prep Time
Meals are ready to eat in 2 minutes
Price Range
$10.99-$13.49 per serving
Add-Ons
More than 65 breakfast items, smoothies, juices, snacks and more add-ons
Portion sizes
Our tester gave Factor 4.5 out of 5 stars for portion sizes, noting that it’s the only meal service she tried that had ample portions
Plenty of options
There are a variety of menu plans to accommodate different preferences, including keto, calorie-controlled, and vegetarian
Pros of Factor
Not restricted to one specific diet plan
Meals arrive fresh and ready to heat
More than 65 add-ons available
Can cancel or skip a delivery anytime
Great portion sizes
Cons of Factor
No personalized plans for weight loss
No options for customization
Meal Type
Prepared
Meals Per Week
6, 8, 10, 12, 14, or 18
Meal Types
Keto, Calorie Smart, Vegetarian, Vegan, Protein Plus
Price Per Serving
Ranges between $10.99-$13.49

Factor75 is a heat-and-eat delivery service that works well for those on specialized diets. Boxes are delivered weekly, and you can mix and match from different menu plans to maximize your menu variety.

At a Glance

  • Prepared meals available in the contiguous U.S.
  • Priced near the average meal service
  • Above-average number of meal plans, including Protein Plus
  • Choose between 6 and 18 meals per week—an above-average range

Factor is one of the most popular prepared meal services on the market, and for good reason. Along with being a convenient option that’s easy to prep, they offer excellent portion sizes, ample variety, and high-quality ingredients. You can also order anywhere from six to 18 meals each week, covering various people’s needs.

Additionally, there are plenty of high-protein options to help fuel your gains, including an entire menu dubbed ‘Protein Plus,’ where each meal contains at least 30 grams of protein per serving.

“These meals can fill up a triathlete in the middle of a tough training block, so they can likely fill up just about anyone,” says GGR Senior Staff Writer and former competitive triathlete Amanda Capritto, CPT, CES, CNC, CF-L1, CSNC, rating Factor’s portion sizes at 4.5 out of 5.

Taste: 4/5

Factor Meals Filet Carrots Plated
Our tester was impressed by the steaks and other proteins in her meals, although not every dish wowed her.

Variety: 4/5

Factor Meals Chicken Alfredo Broccoli 2
The rotating menu adds plenty of variety, although our tester notes that the protein-carb-vegetable meal formats can start to feel a bit repetitive.

Sustainability: 2/5

Factor Meals Unboxing
Even though packaging isn’t too different from the norm, Factor doesn’t seem to prioritize sustainability efforts or sourcing.

Why We Like Factor

Our tester Amanda is also from New Orleans, so she told me she hit most of her Factor meals with some Tony Chachere’s seasoning (if you know, you know). Nevertheless, she rated the taste at a solid 4 out of 5, and mentioned to me that the proteins impressed her most of all. “The steaks were actually pink in the middle, even after microwaving, and didn’t turn into shoe leather, so shoutout to Factor for that,” she explained.

Factor has eight distinct meal plans—Protein Plus, Chef’s Choice, Calorie Smart, Keto, Carb Conscious, GLP-1 Balance, Fiber Filled, Flexitarian—but there is some crossover between them. For example, a Protein Plus meal might also be classified as a Keto meal. 

Because of this versatility, you’ll get to choose from around 30 different meals each week (there are closer to 35 total, but they don’t all fall under the high-protein category). If you want to mix and match, you have that option, too. Even if you sign up for a dedicated meal plan, you’ll still get access to the full weekly menu, which is why Factor earns a 4-out-of-5 rating for variety. 

The menu changes weekly, although you might see some repeat favorites, and Amanda let me know that quite a few meals have a similar set-up: a protein with veggies and grains. 

RELATED: Factor Vs HelloFresh

In addition to meals, you can opt for add-ons like coconut pancakes, bacon and cheddar egg bites, and garlic buffalo chicken wings—all of which fall under the Protein Plus meal plan. There are also cooked bulk meats and fish if you want extra protein as an accompanying side dish.

For microwave meals, the ingredient quality was pretty good. Meats were cooked well and weren’t tough or dry. The grains were all OK, and some vegetables were too mushy for my liking. Overall, though, not bad at all. 

Amanda Capritto, CPT, CES, CNC, CF-L1, CSNC, GGR Senior Staff Writer

Alternatives

Where Factor scored lowest in our testing was in its sustainability efforts, mostly because, well, they don’t seem to put much effort into sustainability. Amanda rates it at a 2 out of 5 and tells me that it didn’t score lower since Factor’s packaging doesn’t seem glaringly different from other, more sustainable meal delivery services.

“The main difference, I suppose, is that each Factor meal comes in its own plastic tray, which is definitely a bit wasteful compared to cooking at home,” she adds.

Additionally, the price per serving is right on the average, costing between $11 and $14 per serving. Factor earns a 3 out of 5 for its middle-of-the-road price point, but the convenience should make it worthwhile for quite a few people.

If you’re looking for pre-portioned meal kits to prepare yourself rather than pre-made meals, we recommend trying Home Chef.

Testing Breakdown

Despite its lack of sustainability efforts, Factor can be a great option for protein-packed prepared meals each day. Here’s how it scored, according to our testing methodology.

Overall Rating: 4/5

Price Per Serving – 3
Ordering Flexibility – 5
Taste – 4
Ease of Preparation – 5
Portion Size – 4.5
Ingredient Quality – 4
Variety – 4
Meal Plans and Customization – 4
Access to Nutritional Information – 5
Packaging and Shipping – 4
Sustainability Efforts – 2
Customer Service – 4
Customer Reviews – 3.6

Vs. The Average

Factor costs around your average meal delivery service, depending on the number of meals you order each week. There is more flexibility in Factor than other meal deliveries, too, as there are more meal plans for dietary preferences. Plus, you can order up to 18 meals a week, which is well above the average metric.

FactorAverage Meal Delivery
Price Per Meal$11.49-$13.99$12.37
TypePrepared mealsPrepared meals
Meals Per Week6, 8, 10, 12, 14, or 186-8
Servings Per Meal11 (prepared meal), 2 (meal kits)
Delivery AreaContiguous U.S.Contiguous U.S.
Diets/Dietary RestrictionsChef’s Choice, Protein Plus, Calorie Smart, Keto, Carb Conscious, GLP-1 Balance, Fiber Filled, FlexitarianPlans vary, but usually 3 options

For more, check out our in-depth Factor Meals review.

Best Prepared High-Protein Meal Delivery: Fuel Meals

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Easy Prep, Protein-Packed
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
3.7
Fuel Meals
Fuel Meals
High-protein
Prepared
Expensive
Free shipping with subscription
Deliver to all 50 states and Puerto Rico
Pause, cancel, or change at any time
Use code FMSAVE40 for 40% off your first order See Details
Meal Types
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner, Snacks, and By the Pound
Delivery Options
Weekly or bi-weekly delivery
Price
Around $15 per meal
Prep Time
Heat and eat in just 3 minutes
Quick Prep
Fuel Meals earned a 5 out of 5 score for ease of preparation, as you only need to microwave them for 3 minutes
High Protein
High-protein meals are great for muscle gain or weight loss
Pros of Fuel Meals
Can order breakfast, lunch, and dinner options
Meals are fresh
Places an emphasis on the most important macronutrient
Free shipping with subscription
Cons of Fuel Meals
No customizations of the meals available
Expensive
Calories may be too low for some
Meal Type
Prepared
Meals Per Week
At least 7
Diet Types
Gluten-free, dairy-free
Price Per Serving
Around $15

Fuel Meals offers two dedicated meals plans—muscle gain and weight loss—catered to both men and women. You can choose to have all daily meals delivered, or stick to just lunch and dinner, on a weekly or bi-weekly delivery cadence. One downside is that there’s no customization of the meals.

At a Glance 

  • Nationwide delivery
  • More expensive than average price per meal
  • Order minimum of 7 meals per week
  • An above-average amount of available meal plans

While many meal delivery services send pre-made meals, Fuel Meals earned the spot of best prepared high-protein meal delivery for its ease of prep and ordering, as well as its balanced macros. “The meals are high-protein, low-fat, and include a moderate amount of carbs,” says registered dietitian Perry Nix. “This balance supports muscle growth and provides enough energy to help you power through your workout.” 

Furthermore, cooking the food couldn’t be simpler, earning a 5 out of 5 for ease of preparation: Just throw your pre-packaged serving in the microwave and it’s done within three minutes.

RELATED: Fuel Meals Discount Code

Ease of Prep: 5/5

fuel-meals-on-stovetop
Fuel Meals are no-hassle pre-made meals that are ready to eat after just a few minutes in the microwave.

Taste: 4/5

An image of Fuel Meals Crispy Buffalo Chicken
Overall, our testers agreed that Fuel Meals tasted pretty good, although some meals lacked in terms of spice or flavor.

Portion Size: 4/5

An image of Fuel Meals Chimichurri Steak and Chicken Quesadilla
One tester felt like the portions could’ve been a bit more, while our other tester thought they were the right size for their preferences.

Why We Like Fuel Meals

We had two certified personal trainers test out Fuel Meals, and both awarded the service a 4 out of 5 on flavor. “The taste is all totally fine and completely edible; I could order and eat it again,” Kate Meier, GGR’s Senior Director of Content and a fellow competitive weightlifter, told me. “But I found myself adding vegetables to the meal, or adding a sauce or a spice to get more out of it.”

Nicole Davis, a Precision Nutrition coach and GGR Director of Content Quality, agreed and found that the meats were typically good, while the sides were oftentimes lackluster. “It was typically just sweet potatoes or potatoes with not much to them,” she says.

You can pick between seven and 20 meals per week, with the nutritional information displayed front and center as you’re scrolling through each week’s menu. The nutritional information is also on meal labels, although Kate noted that each label featured a blurred print. Nicole had no issues, though, so Fuel Meals earns a 4 out of 5 for access to nutrition information.

For me, meals felt like just the perfect size, and they were easy to prepare, too. Just nuke them in the microwave and toss out the container.

Nicole Davis, CPT, PN1-NC, GGR Director of Content

Alternatives

Perry Nix adds that one downside of Fuel meals is that it might not be for adventurous eaters, since their meals consist of traditional “prep” foods—chicken, rice, broccoli, potatoes, etc. There’s nothing wrong with any of those, but some people may prefer a little more variety, which is why we gave Fuel Meals a 3 out of 5 in that category. That said, there are also prepared proteins available by the pound to save time on meal prepping, along with snacks like chocolate protein brownies. 

This is also a pricier meal delivery service with meals starting around $14. For comparison, we’ve determined the average meal delivery service to cost roughly $12.37 per serving. As such, it earns a 2 out of 5 for price per serving.

If you’re looking for a meal delivery service that offers more variety, we recommend trying Factor instead.

Testing Breakdown

Albeit a pricier meal delivery, this prepared meals service scored quite well in its ease of ordering and prep. Below is a breakdown of its scores.

Overall Rating: 3.7/5

Price Per Serving – 2
Ordering Flexibility – 5
Taste – 4
Ease of Preparation – 5
Portion Size – 4
Ingredient Quality – 3
Variety – 3
Meal Plans and Customization – 3
Access to Nutritional Information – 4
Packaging and Shipping – 5
Sustainability Efforts – 3
Customer Service – 3
Customer Reviews – 4.5

Vs. The Average

With meals between $14 and $16, this is one of the pricier high-protein meal deliveries on our list, although the nationwide delivery does make this accessible to states like Alaska and Hawaii.

Fuel MealsAverage Meal Delivery
Price Per Meal$13.95-$15.95$12.37
TypePrepared mealsPrepared meals
Meals Per WeekMinimum of 76-8
Servings Per Meal11 (prepared meal), 2 (meal kits)
Delivery AreaNationwideContiguous U.S.
Diets/Dietary RestrictionsBest Sellers, Performance, Weight Loss, Muscle GainPlans vary, but usually 3 options

Check out our full Fuel Meals review for more information.

Best High-Protein Meal Delivery for Variety: Hungryroot

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Excellent Variety, Top-Notch Ingredients
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.4
Hungryroot
Hungryroot
Meal kit
Affordable
High-quality
Free shipping on orders over $70
100% money-back guarantee on first delivery
Skip, reschedule or cancel at any time
30% off and free gift with every delivery See Details
Diet Types
Accommodates multiple diet types, including vegan, vegetarian, omnivore, pescatarian, gluten-free, dairy, free, and more
Prep Time
Most recipes only take 10 minutes to prepare
Price
$10 per serving
Meals per Week
16
Great taste
Our tester awarded every meal she tried a 5 out of 5 rating, noting that the ingredients are fresh and don’t need extra seasoning
Tons of options
There are meals that fit just about every type of dietary preference
Pros of Hungryroot
Simple and quick
Caters to many styles of eating
Can add on groceries to your order
Affordably priced
Earns high marks for taste and overall eating experience
Cons of Hungryroot
Requires cooking time
Have to meet plan minimum each week (though you can adjust your minimum on a weekly basis)
Ordering process can be time-consuming
Meal Type
Meal kit
Meals Per Week
16
Diet Types
Vegan, vegetarian, omnivore, pescatarian, dairy-free, gluten-free, soy-free, nut-free, egg-free, shellfish-free
Price Per Serving
$10

Hungryroot offers a unique take on meal delivery, in that you find a recipe you like, and the company will send you all of the ingredients to make it. There are many options for types of food to choose from, and you can even order extra groceries that you might need as well. You do have to cook though, so if that’s not interesting to you, this won’t be the right plan.

At a Glance 

  • Meal kit service delivering to the contiguous U.S.
  • Less expensive price per serving
  • Above average meals per week
  • Accommodates an above-average amount of dietary needs

Looking for variety? You’ve found it with Hungryroot, which is basically a meal kit delivery service and online grocery store mashed into one. When signing up, you take a quiz outlining your preferences and dietary needs, and Hungryroot will automatically load hundreds of recipes that work for you, earning 5 out of 5 stars for variety.

“You essentially shop for meals and groceries at the same time each week, and you pick things you like and remove things you don’t want,” adds Kate Meier, CPT, USAW-L1, CF-L1, and GGR Senior Director of Content. “Any item you’d want, it’s more than likely available on Hungryroot.”

Ease of Prep: 4/5

Woman Cooking Hungryroot Chicken Burrito Bowl
Hungryroot sends pre-portioned ingredients, so these meal kits still take only around 10 minutes to cook and serve.

Variety: 5/5

Four Ingredients In Hungryroot Chicken Burrito Bowl
This meal kit service acts like an online grocery store, providing customers a wide range of recipes, ingredients, and snacks in a one-stop shop format.

Ordering: 3/5

Image of an entire Hungryroot Order In One Delivery
Although we like the variety, the ordering process and initial quiz can be a bit overwhelming, according to our tester’s experience.

Why We Like Hungryroot

Hungryroot acts like a meal kit service, since you can filter recipes by protein type or cook time. When you see a recipe you like, you can add it to your cart, and all the necessary ingredients will load for you. However, you can also shop the site like an online grocery store, adding proteins, organic produce, spices, sauces, cheeses, and most other ingredients that you’d find in a supermarket. This only adds to the variety and brings a uniqueness to the shopping experience, as a whole.

The majority of the recipes take around 10 minutes or less since Hungryroot relies on a lot of pre-cooked (but high-quality) ingredients. Kate tested Hungryroot and was a big fan of the ingredient quality and the taste of the meals she tried (which she confirmed took less than 10 minutes to prepare). She gave Hungryroot a 4.5 out of 5 for ingredient quality and a 4 out of 5 for ease of preparation.

RELATED: Hungryroot vs. HelloFresh

“Hungryroot helps you find the best plan for your dietary needs and preferences. They include groceries and recipes made without common food allergens, like soy, nuts, shellfish, and eggs, which is hard to find in other meal service plans,” registered dietitian Perry Nix said to me.

Everything is so fresh, and you don’t need to do any seasoning because most foods are already prepped for you with spices. If you wanted more salt or whatever, you could add your own, of course.

Kate Meier, NASM-CPT, USAW-L1, CF-L1, GGR Senior Director of Content

Alternatives

If there’s a major complaint with Hungryroot, it can be from the initial quiz upon signing up. It’s a thorough quiz, covering most aspects you can think of like how much you enjoy cooking, what style of cuisine you enjoy (Thai, Italian, or Mexican, for example), and flavors or foods you dislike. They fill up your cart based on your quiz, and then you can edit it for up to six days.

Kate admitted to me, “The process is, honestly, a bit confusing. I’m almost not sure if I’m getting recipes or groceries.” The answer, in reality, is you’re getting both, but the initial ordering process can certainly be overwhelming to some, which is why it scores a 3 out of 5 in the category.

For a simpler ordering process, you may want to consider a company like Trifecta, which ships frozen meals that can be stored in the freezer. It has a pretty straightforward ordering process, as well.

Testing Breakdown

Hungryroot is a favorite among the meal delivery services we’ve tested. Although the initial ordering and quiz can be daunting, it scored well, overall.

Overall Rating: 4.4/5

Price Per Serving – 4
Ordering Flexibility – 3
Taste – 5
Ease of Preparation – 4
Portion Size – 4
Ingredient Quality – 4.5
Variety – 5
Meal Plans and Customization – 5
Access to Nutritional Information – 4
Packaging and Shipping – 5
Sustainability Efforts – 5
Customer Service – 4
Customer Reviews – 4.4

Vs. The Average

Because of the unique ordering experience of Hungryroot, prices can vary per meal, but in our experience, they average out below the standard and sit around $10 per meal. The company also allows for filtering through several dietary needs and preferences, which is a customization not typically shared among common meal subscription services.

HungryrootAverage Meal Delivery
Price Per MealAround $10$12.37
TypeMeal kitsPrepared meals
Meals Per Week166-8
Servings Per Meal2 or 41 (prepared meal), 2 (meal kits)
Delivery AreaContiguous U.S.Contiguous U.S.
Diets/Dietary RestrictionsVegan, vegetarian, omnivore, pescatarian, dairy-free, gluten-free, soy-free, nut-free, egg-free, shellfish-freePlans vary, but usually 3 options

For more information, read our in-depth Hungryroot review.

Best Keto High-Protein Meal Delivery: Trifecta

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Solid Variety
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.2
Trifecta
Trifecta
Prepared
Bulk options
High-quality
Free shipping on orders over $70
100% money-back guarantee on first delivery
Skip, reschedule or cancel at any time
Diet Types
Clean, Paleo (Whole30), Keto, plant-based, GLP-1
Prep Time
Requires just a few minutes in the microwave or air fryer
Price
Around $15 per meal
Meals per Week
7, 10, or 14 entrees
Fast prep
Our tester rated Trifecta a 5 out of 5 in the prep category since all you have to do is reheat the meals in the air fryer or microwave
Tons of options
There are six different menu plans, including clean, Whole30, paleo, keto, and high-protein vegan
Pros of Trifecta
Several types of meal plans available
Can also choose a bulk meal prep option
Can get breakfasts as well as entrees
The company prioritizes high-quality ingredients
Some customization available
Cons of Trifecta
Expensive (but ingredients are high-quality)
Limited personalization available
Meal Type
Prepared
Meals Per Week
7, 10, or 14
Diet Types
Clean, Paleo (Whole30), Keto, plant-based, GLP-1
Price Per Serving
Around $15

Trifecta combines convenience with healthy eating. While all meals are pre-cooked and pre-portioned, the ingredients are high-quality and preservative-free. While you have a ton of options, keep in mind that this is a fairly expensive meal delivery service.

At a Glance 

  • Nationwide delivery range
  • Pricier meal delivery service when to average costs
  • Can order an above-average number of meals each week
  • Above-average amount of available meal plans

Trifecta doesn’t have a dedicated high-protein meal service, per se, but the company does offer a clean meal plan, a paleo/Whole30-approved plan, and a keto diet plan—all of which have around 30 to 40 grams of protein per meal, at the very least. (If you prefer plant-based protein, there’s also a high-protein vegan plan, but the protein per meal averages slightly lower at around 20 grams.) 

With its solid keto and low-carb options, Trifecta earns our spot as the best keto meal delivery service for high-protein meals, and it earns a 4 out of 5 for meal plans and customizations; along with a keto meal plan, you can choose between paleo, Whole30, and high-protein vegan or vegetarian meal plans.

Taste: 4/5

Trifecta Chicken Broccoli Casserole
While one of our testers thought meals were hit-or-miss, others felt that most dishes tasted perfectly fine.

Price Per Serving: 3/5

Trifecta Meals in an insulated box
Starting at $15 a meal, Trifecta is a pricier meal delivery service, although the convenience might make it worth the cost for some.

Variety: 5/5

An image of multiple Trifecta Meal Packages stacked on top of each other
From egg scrambles and chicken to casseroles and steaks, Trifecta has plenty of variety in their weekly menu.

Why We Like Trifecta

Trifecta’s whole business model is built around health and fitness, and while we can’t guarantee that eating these meals will help you finally nail those double-unders, we can say that these meals are perfectly designed for tracking macros. The macronutrients are listed on the outside of each package, making it easy for athletes with strict dietary requirements to log and monitor their intake. As such, we rate Trifecta at 5 out of 5 for nutritional information access.

RELATED: Tracking Macros for Weight Loss

GGR Senior Director of Content and certified personal trainer (CPT) Kate Meier adds that the ‘Chef’s Choice’ plan can be a good option if you like variety—scoring it a 5 out of 5—because the meals are all different. If you’re a picky eater, though, you’ll likely want to curate your weekly orders on your own.

Despite the focus on prepared meals, Trifecta still uses quality ingredients in each dish, which earns a 4 out of 5 from Kate. “A lot of the ingredients are organic or come from sustainable sources, and they’re really fresh and healthy,” she tells me. “They come vacuum-packed, which I really like, too.”

Another notable callout is that all of Trifecta’s meals are gluten-free, and they’re made with non-GMO and organic ingredients with grass-fed meats and sustainably sourced seafood. Trifecta doesn’t use artificial additives, so the ingredients are higher in quality.

Trifecta offers high-protein, macro-balanced meals, made for those looking to improve strength and build muscle. All meals are made with lean protein, complex carbs, and veggies.

Perry Nix, MS, R.D., L.D.

Alternatives

We had multiple testers try out Trifecta, which resulted in mixed reviews on the taste. The service earns a 4 out of 5 for its overall flavor, with Kate mentioning, “I didn’t mind the meals at all, but I tend to eat pretty plainly and don’t usually use a lot of spices.”

Our other tester, Sarah, had mixed feelings on the taste. She told me, “Some I liked and I was excited to eat, while others I’d end up throwing away.”

Another quick callout is the price, which we rate at 3 out of 5. The cost per meal is about $15 or $16, depending on the number of meals you purchase, making it one of the pricier meal services out there.

Trifecta is great, but if you want something a little more affordable, Tempo by Home Chef is another good option to consider, with meals starting under $11.

Testing Breakdown

Even though Trifecta is pricier than other meal kits we’ve tested, it scored pretty well in our testing, nonetheless.

Overall Rating: 4.2/5

Price Per Serving – 3
Ordering Flexibility – 4
Taste – 4
Ease of Preparation – 5
Portion Size – 5
Ingredient Quality – 4
Variety – 5
Meal Plans and Customization – 4
Access to Nutritional Information – 5
Packaging and Shipping – 5
Sustainability Efforts – 3
Customer Service – 4
Customer Reviews – 4

Vs. The Average

Trifecta is well above the average price per meal, but its nationwide delivery and higher meal orders per week might be enough to convince some users of the meal delivery’s value.

TrifectaAverage Meal Delivery
Price Per Meal$14.99-$16$12.37
TypePrepared mealsPrepared meals
Meals Per Week7, 10, or 146-8
Servings Per Meal11 (prepared meal), 2 (meal kits)
Delivery AreaNationwideContiguous U.S.
Diets/Dietary RestrictionsClean, Paleo (Whole30), Keto, Plant-Based, GLP-1Plans vary, but usually 3 options

You can read our Trifecta meal delivery review for a closer look at this healthy meal delivery service.

Best Vegan High-Protein Meal Delivery: Purple Carrot

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Perfectly Rated in Ingredient Quality
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4
Purple Carrot
Vegetarian
Vegan
Meal kit
Free shipping on orders over $100
Vegan and vegetarian
Skip or cancel at any time
Vegan-Friendly
All of Purple Carrot’s meals are 100% vegan
Prep Time
Purple Carrot offers quick-prep meal options that take less than 25 minutes to prepare
Price
$13.25 per serving for 2-serving meal kit
Options
Breakfasts, lunches, dinners, and pantry items available
Portion sizes
Our tester gave Factor 4 out of 5 stars for portion sizes, noting that it’s “quite generous for a plant-based meal service”
Plenty of options
Purple Carrot offers meal kits, ready-to-eat options, groceries, and more
Pros of Purple Carrot
Has meal kits and prepared meals
Can choose from the whole menu
Menus change weekly
Great option for vegans and vegetarians
Cons of Purple Carrot
Can’t mix and match meal types
Maxes out at 4 meals per week
No option for add-on proteins
Meal Type
Prepared or meal kit
Meals Per Week
Up to 4
Meal Types
Plant-based
Price Per Serving
Ranges between $11-$13.49 per serving

Purple Carrot offers vegan meal kits and prepared meals. There are no specific meal plans, but you can choose from the full menu, which includes breakfasts, lunches, dinners and “plantry” items—add-on products like brownie bites and salad dressing. You can’t mix and match meal types, though.

At a Glance 

  • Plant-based meal kit service
  • Priced around the average cost of comparable meal kits
  • Above-average meal options available
  • Ships to contiguous United States

Purple Carrot is a one-stop shop for all your plant-based food needs. You can pick between vegan meal kits if you’d like to cook your food, receive ready-to-eat meals that just need reheating, or shop the grocery section to pick up vegan cheeses, snacks, beverages, and more, earning the service a 4.5 out of 5 for variety. There are several high-protein options, too, that are loaded with fiber to keep you full throughout the day.

“A plant-based diet can help reduce inflammation and decrease your risk of developing a chronic disease,” says Perry Nix, a registered dietitian. “The company uses seasonal ingredients so you can add new foods into your rotation without ever getting bored.”

Taste: 5/5

Sloppy joes from Purple Carrot
Our product tester found meals to be high-quality, delicious in flavor, and to have sizable portions.

Ingredient Quality: 5/5

Purple Carrot Meal Ingredients
Our product tester displays the ingredients delivered from Purple Carrot on their stovetop.

Plans & Customizations: 3/5

A Purple Carrot Meal Delivery box resting on a porch.
Purple Carrot doesn’t have much along the lines of customizations, although meals do cater to plant-based diets.

Why We Like Purple Carrot

Certified personal trainer Anthony O’Reilly tested out this plant-based meal delivery, which he rated a 5 out of 5 on taste. “My favorite was the Sloppy Joes made with tofu,” he told me. “Considering this was a plant-based meal service, I was quite happy with how everything came out, and the portions were quite good.”

Anthony, a passionate home cook, said the meal kit instructions fell a bit flat for him. “Some recipes were missing steps that I’d consider crucial to the cooking process,” he mentioned to me. “Something as simple as dry-patting tofu before cooking, which helps reduce moisture to better achieve a perfect sear, was omitted.” He gave the ease of preparation a 3 out of 5, saying most recipes took under 20 minutes but required dirtying a few bowls.

On the other hand, Nicole Davis, PN1-NC, CPT, tried out some of the prepared meal options and had a much different experience. “It’s simple; just pop the meal in the microwave,” she explained to me. “It couldn’t be easier.”

The ordering process is simple in and of itself, and there is a companion app available to streamline the process, too, earning the service a 5 out of 5 for ordering.

Everything tasted really fresh. The veggies still had a nice crunch, and there were plenty of textures throughout—it wasn’t like you were eating reheated mush, which is what I sometimes feel like ready-made or frozen meals can taste like.

Nicole Davis, CPT, PN1-NC, GGR Director of Content Quality

Alternatives

Even though ordering is simple enough, it might take a while to find the protein-packed meal of your choice. Unlike other websites, Purple Carrot doesn’t have a way to filter its protein-rich options, so you’ll have to scroll and look for ones with a dumbbell icon—the brand’s marker that you’ll get more than 30 grams of protein per serving in that particular dish.

Along the same lines, Purple Carrot doesn’t have any real meal plans or customizations, so it earns a 3 out of 5 in the category. Obviously, the meal service will cater to any plant-based diet, but it’s challenging to filter out or find other specific dietary preferences like nut or grain allergies.

If you’re not interested in a vegan meal delivery service, something like Tempo by Home Chef may be a better choice.

Testing Breakdown

Although our testers appreciated the quality ingredients and flavors used, the lack of meal plans and longer preparation times impacted Purple Carrot’s score.

Overall Rating: 4/5

Price Per Serving – 3
Ordering Flexibility – 5
Taste – 5
Ease of Preparation – 3
Portion Size – 4
Ingredient Quality – 5
Variety – 4.5
Meal Plans and Customization – 3
Access to Nutritional Information – 2
Packaging and Shipping – 5
Sustainability Efforts – 5
Customer Service – 5
Customer Reviews – 2.8

Vs. The Average

Purple Carrot stands out as one of the few entirely plant-based meal deliveries available. It’s priced around the average, but does offer both meal kits and prepared meals.

Purple CarrotAverage Meal Delivery
Price Per Meal$11-$13.49$12.37
TypeMeal kits and prepared mealsPrepared meals
Meals Per WeekUp to 46-8
Servings Per Meal2 or 41 (prepared meal), 2 (meal kits)
Delivery AreaContiguous U.S.Contiguous U.S.
Diets/Dietary RestrictionsVegetarian, Vegan, Nut-Free, Soy-Free, High-Protein, Gluten-FreePlans vary, but usually 3 options

Check out our in-depth Purple Carrot review.

Best Organic High-Protein Meal Delivery: Green Chef

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Organic Ingredients, High Sustainability Efforts
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
3.9
Green Chef
Green Chef
Organic
Meal kit
Expensive
Plant-based options
Flat fee of $9.99 per box
Skip weeks, swap recipes, or cancel anytime
Use code GGR50FB for 50% off on your first box + 20% off for two months See Details
Meal Types
Meal kit
Menu Options
80+ weekly menu and market items
Price Range
Starts at $11.99
Organic
Green Chef uses fresh, seasonal, and organic ingredients, including whole fruits and vegetables, cage-free eggs, and organic chicken
Customizable
Choose from eight different plans, including protein-packed, plant-based, quick and easy, gluten-free, and more
Pros of Green Chef
Offers several specialized diet plans
Can mix and match meal plans
Most ingredients are organic and high-quality
Discounts for first responders, medical providers, nurses, teachers, and military and veterans
Cons of Paleo on the Go
On the expensive side (but ingredients are organic)
Portion sizes could be bigger
Must pay flat-rate shipping fee
Meal Type
Meal Kit
Meals Per Week
3-4
Diet Plans
Mediterranean, Keto, Protein-Packed, Calorie Smart, Plant-Based, Quick & Easy, Gluten-Free, and Gut & Brain Health
Price
Meals start at $11.99

If you want high-quality and/or organic ingredients, Green Chef is a good option that can feed two to six people per recipe. There are several specialized diets to choose from, and you can mix and match from weekly menus to suit your needs.

At a Glance 

  • Meal kit service priced around the average cost
  • Below-average number of meals per week
  • Above-average amount of meal plans and options
  • Delivers to the contiguous United States

Green Chef is one of the only certified organic meal delivery companies we’ve come across. As such, it can be an excellent option if getting plenty of nutrient-dense whole foods is just as important to you as maximizing your protein intake. “Green Chef is all-organic, which is a great no-brainer for those who prioritize organic food,” said GGR Director of Content Quality Nicole Davis, CPT, PN1-NC, rating the ingredient quality at 4.5 out of 5.

Taste: 4.5/5

Woman Eating A Green Chef Meal
Our tester tried both dinners and breakfasts, enjoying both categories overall. That said, the dinner meals were certainly their favorite of the bunch.

Ingredient Quality: 4.5/5

Prep work for a meal from Green Chef
Being one of the only organic-certified meal delivery services, Green Chef has consistently high-quality ingredients.

Portion Size: 3/5

A plated meal from the Green Chef meal service
We found portion sizes to be pretty small. Our tester felt like she could eat more than one portion without challenge.

Why We Like Green Chef

This is one of the few meal-kit-only services to make this list, but everything is super easy to prepare and most meals are ready to eat in 20 to 30 minutes. Some of the lunches can easily be thrown together in as little as 10 minutes, too. Nicole also told me that since you’re cooking it yourself, you can choose to add or omit ingredients based on your preferences.

There are eight Green Chef meal plans, including Mediterranean, keto, and gluten-free options. But the Protein Packed plan includes only meals that contain at least 40 grams of protein per serving, which Perry Nix, RD, LD, says is a good amount for optimal muscle protein synthesis.

RELATED: Best Organic Meal Delivery

Overall, Nicole rated the taste of the meals at 4.5 out of 5, saying, “The Monterey Jack cheese-smothered chicken with mushrooms and squash was delicious. So, too, were the chicken burrito bowls.” She also liked the breakfast items she tried, including oatmeal that was quick and easy to prepare, and muffins, which her kids enjoyed.

In addition to being certified organic, Green Chef’s paleo and keto meal plans are also certified gluten-free. This means they’re safe for people with celiac disease and anyone with gluten sensitivities.

Perry Nix, MS, R.D., L.D.

Alternatives

You can choose three or four recipes per week and opt for two, four, or six servings of each meal. In Nicole’s experience, the portion sizes are pretty small, so opting for one of the bigger plans can ensure you’ll have enough food to meet your needs and keep you full.

“I could easily eat one and some of another, and one portion would never be enough for my husband on its own (he’s an active, 6-foot-2 guy),” Nicole explained to me. “With the other meal kits, I ate one portion for dinner and saved the other for lunch the next day, but I couldn’t do that with this service.” She rates Green Chef at 3 out of 5 for the portion size.

Nicole also mentioned the higher cost in relation to the smaller portion size; you’re not getting as much food yet paying around the same price as your average meal delivery. Still, organic ingredients typically come at a premium cost, so we’re not too surprised by this. Accordingly, we rate Green Chef at 3 out of 5 for the price.

If you’re looking for larger portion sizes, you may want to consider Home Chef instead.

Testing Breakdown

Although a pricier meal kit service with less-than-ideal portion sizes, Green Chef has quality ingredients and takes great strides in sustainability, earning it a decent overall score in our testing.

Overall Rating: 3.9/5

Price Per Serving – 3
Ordering Flexibility – 4
Taste – 4.5
Ease of Preparation – 3
Portion Size – 3
Ingredient Quality – 4.5
Variety – 3.75
Meal Plans and Customization – 4
Access to Nutritional Information – 5
Packaging and Shipping – 4
Sustainability Efforts – 5
Customer Service – 3.5
Customer Reviews – 3.7

Vs. The Average

Priced around the same as the average meal delivery, you can choose meals to serve two, four, or six individuals—higher than your average meal kit.

Green ChefAverage Meal Delivery
Price Per Meal$11.99-$13.49$12.37
TypeMeal kitPrepared meals
Meals Per Week3 or 46-8
Servings Per Meal2, 4, or 61 (prepared meal), 2 (meal kits)
Delivery AreaContiguous U.S.Contiguous U.S.
Diets/Dietary RestrictionsMediterranean, Calorie Smart, Quick & Easy, Plant Based, Protein Packed, Keto, Gut & Brain Health, Gluten FreePlans vary, but usually 3 options

For more, check out our in-depth Green Chef reviews.

Other High-Protein Meal Deliveries We Researched

Having tested more than 60 meal delivery services—and with that number continuing to climb—there are plenty of other high-protein options available to budding subscribers. That said, not every service can make our list. Here are a few delivery services with meals high in protein that deserve an honorable mention:

  • MealPro: MealPro has a lot of high-protein options, and there was a lot to love about the service like generous portion sizes and quality ingredients. That said, the meals arrived frozen and many of them were kind of bland, according to Caine Wilkes, GGR Senior Staff Writer and Olympic Weightlifter. Because of that, we skipped this one for this list.
  • Ice Age Meals: These are paleo-style, high-protein meals that taste pretty good, according to Lauren Strong, CPT. However, she says the meal breakdown was a little strange with heaping amounts of vegetables in comparison to the meat. There were also fewer menu options than some of the other services we examined.
  • Snap Kitchen: Snap Kitchen received high ratings across the board, but the delivery range is pretty limited, being largely focused in Texas. Until they can serve more locations, we’re hesitant to recommend them to the general public.
  • Muscle Meals 2 Go: As the name suggests, Muscle Meals 2 Go has plenty of high-protein, muscle-building meals—particularly dishes catering to keto and low-carb diets. However, our tester found these prepared meals to be good, but nothing fancy.

How We Picked and Tested the Best High-Protein Meal Deliveries

When narrowing down our list of the best high-protein meal delivery services, the first thing we looked at was (naturally) the protein content. Many companies claim they have high-protein meal plans, but when you look under the hood, the meals actually don’t have ample amounts of this foundational macronutrient.

Evidence suggests that the long-recommended goal of consuming 15% of calories from protein per day is suboptimal4. Instead, protein recommendations vary between individuals, depending on various factors and specific health goals. Generally, a high-protein diet involves at least 30% of calories per day coming from protein4. Aiming for a minimum of 25 to 30 grams of protein per meal is usually necessary to hit this 30%.

Person having prepared mini flatbreads with dates from Home Chef
Our tester enjoying some prepared mini flatbreads with dates from Home Chef

Instead of taking a company’s claims at face value, we dug into nutrition facts and made sure that any brands we recommended offered, at least, 25 grams of protein per meal. The major exception here was examined in vegan and vegetarian plans that only offered plant-based meal options. For these instances, we lowered that threshold to around 20 grams per meal.

Once we had that shortlist, we tapped registered dietitian Perry Nix, RD, to give her thoughts on each high-protein meal delivery service we chose for research and testing. We asked her to give her initial impression and then comment on the good and not-so-good of each service.

Our GGR expert testers then went through the ordering process from signup to checkout to see how each subscription operated. They had the meals delivered to their homes and followed the cooking instructions as recommended by the company. Throughout the entire process, they made notes and compiled ratings in key categories on a scale of 1 to 5. Such categories included:

  • Ordering: We examined how seamless the process was when it came to selecting meals from the weekly menus and adding them to our respective carts. Meal services earning an average 3-out-of-5 rating offered clearly labeled options with some room for customizations, but the interface and ordering process was occasionally tricky or problematic.
  • Price per serving: Meal prices can vary, but we rated meal services at 3 out of 5 if the price per serving was a bit over $10—close to the average cost of a typical meal subscription plan.
  • Taste: We gathered notes from our testers as well as customer reviews for this flavorful factor. A 3-out-of-5 on our scale means the food in each meal was fine—but don’t expect any chef-prepared meals that completely redefine your thoughts on cuisine.
  • Portion size: We favored filling portions, awarding a 4 out of 5 to services with portion sizes that were just the right amount for the majority of our testers.
  • Variety: You don’t want to get bored of the same meals over and over again, so we noted how varied the available menus were week to week. A 3-out-of-5 rating means there may be some repetition in meals on occasion, but for the most part, these repeating dishes can be tolerated.
  • Ease of preparation: Meal prep can range from taking over an hour with multiple utensils and cookware to just a few minutes in a microwave. To earn a 3 out of 5, each meal should require only a handful of utensils and take roughly 20 minutes to prepare. The highest scores go to prepared meals that take just minutes to reheat in the microwave or oven.
  • Ingredient quality: Do dishes arrive fresh or frozen? How fresh are the ingredients? Ingredients get a 3 out of 5 if they’re just “OK”—nothing offensive, but maybe not freshly picked foods.
  • Packaging and shipping: We took a look at how meals physically arrived at your doorstep, as well. A meal service that uses ice packs for maintained freshness but lacks real-time shipping updates gets a 3 out of 5 here.
  • Sustainability efforts: To minimize their environmental impact, some brands use recyclable materials throughout the packaging and sustainably source their ingredients. Companies that use recyclable materials for at least half of their parcels earn a 3 out of 5 in this category.
Ingredients for the Honey Butter Pork Chop recipe from the Home Chef meal delivery service.
Ingredients for the Honey Butter Pork Chop recipe from the Home Chef meal delivery service

Our testers also made notes about their experience, highlighting anything that was especially good or bad. We then averaged out these scores for an overall rating for each meal delivery service. These overall grades helped us compile our list based on which ones scored highest overall (and didn’t have any major complaints for the aforementioned testing categories). The end result is the listed best high-protein meal delivery services we’re recommending here.

Benefits of High-Protein Meal Deliveries

There are a lot of benefits to signing up for a high-protein meal delivery service. Some of the biggest are convenience, an easier time hitting your macro goals, and flexibility.

Convenience

The biggest benefit of a high-protein meal delivery service (or any meal delivery service, really) is convenience. You can choose your level of involvement based on how much time you’d like to spend in the kitchen whipping up meals each day.

For example, if you opt for a prepared meals service, you don’t have to do anything but heat your food and then wash a fork after you eat it, similar to how you just have to chug a meal replacement shake and wash your shaker post-consumption. If you choose a meal kit, the shopping and chopping are already mostly done for you. All that’s left is to throw some ingredients together, and you have a freshly cooked meal in about 30 minutes, on average.

Easier to Hit Your Macro Goals

This ties into the convenience factor a little bit, but we think it deserves its own separate callout. Macro counting (and healthy eating, in general) can be hard, especially if you’re new to it. And if you have high-protein goals, it can be a struggle to routinely hit these aspirations through traditional meal prepping alone.

An image of macros for weight loss

High-protein meal delivery services do this job for you. Chefs and, in some cases, nutritionists work together to curate these meals, so all you have to do is choose the ones you like. Depending on which service you sign up for, you should get anywhere from 25 to 80 grams of protein per meal. Eat just three meals, and you’re at 75 to 240 grams for the day without any other thought.

RELATED: Protein Shakes for Bulking

Flexibility

Most of the meal delivery services we recommend also offer a lot of flexibility. Unlike some really restrictive plans, a high-protein lifestyle can leave more room for different meal types. Most high-protein meal delivery services allow you to mix and match from different meal plans, so you’re getting a variety of meals to help you stay on track more effectively.

These subscriptions also offer flexibility in the sense that you can skip a delivery or pause your service if you ever need to. So, while a subscription service is somewhat of a commitment, there’s still room to work it into your lifestyle (and budget) in a way that works for you.

Buying Guide: What to Look for in High-Protein Meal Delivery Services

There are a lot of good high-protein meal delivery services out there. Just because they’re good, however, doesn’t mean they’re necessarily the best for you. Here are some things you should look for when narrowing down your choices.

Protein Content

At the risk of stating the obvious, one of the first things you should look for in a high-protein meal delivery service is the protein content. Some services claim they have high-protein meal plans, but when you dig a little deeper into the nutrition facts, you may find that you’re getting less than 20 grams of protein per meal.

There’s no hard rule about what classifies something as “high-protein,” but in general, you’ll want at least 30% of your calories to be coming from protein5. When shopping around, look for companies that list the nutrition facts for their meals and choose ones that offer around 25 to 50 (or more) grams of protein per serving.

Variety and Rotating Menus

Some high-protein meal delivery companies offer the same menu week after week, while others have regularly changing menus to keep things fresh and interesting. If you prefer to stick to the same tried-and-true meals, this may be less important to you, but if you like to switch things up, make sure the subscription service you choose has enough variety to keep you happy.

Items from a Green Chef Delivery
A full order’s haul of Green Chef goods

Price

Prices per meal can vary from service to service—and high-protein options can sometimes be pricier—but we find the average to be around $12 per meal. There are budget options that have meals under $6 per meal, so shop around if you’re looking for the cheapest meal delivery service. Another way to save on your order is by buying more; many meal delivery services offer a discounted price per serving for larger bulk orders. Regardless, the ideal meal delivery will be one that suits your budget best.

Add-Ons

This is optional, but many of the meal delivery services we recommend also offer add-ons like protein pancakes or cooked, bulk protein options that allow you to supplement what you’re getting with your meals. If you don’t think you can meet your protein needs through your meals alone, or you’re planning on adding snacks or extra protein to your day anyway, having the option of including these add-ons in your weekly delivery can make things a whole lot easier.

Other Dietary Considerations

There are a lot of high-protein options across the realm of meal delivery services. Some are completely gluten-free, and others are vegan. Some are low-carb, while others are dairy-free. If the only requirement you have is that the meals are high in protein, you can stop there. 

RELATED: Best Gluten-Free Meal Delivery

If you need more specialized meals (or have additional dietary requirements), you’ll need to dig a little deeper to see if these services can accommodate your preferences and/or allow you to customize your meals. You’ll also want to make sure the company is using high-quality ingredients without a lot of additives or preservatives.

FAQs About the Best High-Protein Meal Delivery

What is the best high-protein meal delivery service?

The best high-protein meal delivery service will largely depend on your health and wellness goals, as well as how much meal prep you’d like to do. That said, our pick for the best high-protein meal delivery for most people is Home Chef, which has great-tasting meal kits in ample portion sizes, as well as a variety of high-protein meals with some reaching over 30 grams of protein per serving.

Are high-protein meal deliveries worth it?

If you’re looking for a convenient way to incorporate more protein into your daily routine, meal deliveries can be a great option, especially if they have a meal plan high in protein. Although high-protein prepared meals and meal kits may be slightly pricier than your average grocery run, they can save you plenty of time—both in trips to the grocery store and in-kitchen preparation. Additionally, with many high-protein meals having 30 grams of protein or more in each serving, they can provide extra protein to hit your nutrition goals more easily.

Does HelloFresh offer high-protein meals?

Yes, HelloFresh does have some high-protein options. Some of the meals contain 30 to 40 grams of protein, and there’s a ‘Meat and Veggies’ meal plan that’s also lower in carbs (and, by default, higher in protein) than some of the other options we recommend. It didn’t make our list of the best high-protein meal delivery services, however, because there is no dedicated high-protein meal plan, and you have to dig into each meal’s nutrition facts to see which ones qualify.

These statements have not been evaluated by the Food and Drug Administration. This product is not intended to diagnose, treat, cure, or prevent any diseases.

References

  1. Antonio, J, Candow, DG, Forbes, SC, Ormsbee, MJ, Saracino, PG, Roberts, J. Effects of dietary protein on body composition in exercising individuals. Nutrients. 2020;12(6):1890. doi:10.3390/nu12061890
  2. Trommelen, J., Betz, M. W., & van Loon, L. J. C. (2019). The muscle protein synthetic response to meal ingestion following resistance-type exercise. Sports medicine (Auckland, N.Z.), 49(2), 185–197. https://doi.org/10.1007/s40279-019-01053-5
  3. Stokes, T., Hector, A. J., Morton, R. W., McGlory, C., & Phillips, S. M. (2018). Recent perspectives regarding the role of dietary protein for the promotion of muscle hypertrophy with resistance exercise training. Nutrients, 10(2), 180. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu10020180
  4. Moon, J., & Koh, G. (2020). Clinical evidence and mechanisms of high-protein diet-induced weight loss. Journal of obesity & metabolic syndrome, 29(3), 166–173. https://doi.org/10.7570/jomes20028
  5. Pesta, D. H., & Samuel, V. T. (2014). A high-protein diet for reducing body fat: mechanisms and possible caveats. Nutrition & metabolism, 11(1), 53. https://doi.org/10.1186/1743-7075-11-53
]]>
Best Kettlebells (2026): 7 Expert-Tested Picks for Swings, Squats, and More https://www.garagegymreviews.com/best-kettlebells Tue, 06 Jan 2026 23:19:40 +0000 https://www.garagegymreviews.com/?p=88140 When it comes to blending strength and conditioning, kettlebells are some of the most versatile home gym essentials around. The tricky part about buying the best kettlebell, though, is that many of them look and feel the same. However, there are key differences—be it price, coating, durability, weight increments, or even the handle width—that can impact your workout experience.

Our team of certified personal trainers, CrossFit coaches, and competitive athletes uses kettlebells on a regular basis, and we’ve personally put our hands on just about every type of ‘bell there is—from the most basic all the way to fully adjustable models. We use our kettlebell testing methodology to evaluate kettlebells using a 1-5 scoring system, assessing key factors like:

  • Construction: To earn a 3 out of 5, a kettlebell should have a smooth, consistent shape with no seams or weak points.
  • Durability: For a kettlebell to earn at least a 3-out-of-5 rating, it should maintain its integrity and finish even with frequent drops and repeated use.
  • Handle: We give a 3 out of 5 to handles that feel comfortable in use and profiles that allow you to maintain control during training.
  • Weight range: To earn at least a 3 out of 5, kettlebells must have a sufficient weight selection to accommodate a variety of exercises and training intensities.

In addition to our research and proprietary testing, we consulted with GGR Chief Medical Advisor, Dr. Raj Dasgupta, MD, FACP, FCCP, FAASM, and exercise physiologist Dr. Chris Mohr, RD, to discuss how kettlebell training can be an integral part of your overall exercise routine. To ensure medical accuracy, we also contacted Dr. Bilal Ahsan, a resident physician in Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation (PM&R) specializing in musculoskeletal, neurological, and sports-related conditions.

We helped nearly 1,400 athletes find the right kettlebells for their training needs in 2025, and we’re confident our picks below will help you, too.

GGR Gold Pick — Best Kettlebells

The 4.6-star-rated REP Fitness Kettlebell Set gets our nod as the best kettlebell largely due to its heavy-duty cast iron construction and durable powder coating. Additionally, each kettlebell handle is grippy, and weights are distinctly color-coded.

The 7 Best Kettlebells of 2026

Current Top Deals

Now is a great time to upgrade your kettlebell setup with major sales from top fitness brands. Browse the deals below to find one that suits your goals and budget.

Latest Updates

In February 2026, we reviewed our list of the top kettlebells to make sure we’re still highlighting the best of the best. We also added more information to our buyers’ guide to help inform your purchasing decision.

Best Kettlebell Overall: REP Fitness Kettlebell Set

Updated by: Amanda Capritto, CPT, CES, CF-L1, CNC, CSNC

Excellent Optionality and Build Quality 
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.6
REP Fitness Kettlebell Set
5 weights per set
Gravity die-cast
Powdercoat finish
Free shipping available
30-day, money-back guarantee
Available in single- & dual-weight sets
Free shipping on every order See Details
5-in-1 Bundle
You receive five kettlebells per set between 8 and 24 kilograms, with dual-weight options available.
Gravity Die-Cast
A gravity die-cast iron construction helps improve durability and weight precision for a clean, high-quality bell.
Free Shipping
No need to worry about costly shipping fees—REP Fitness offers free shipping with this kettlebell set.
Dual Weight Marks
In addition to color-coded bands, REP includes imperial and metric weight totals on each kettlebell.
Pros
Bundled weight set for more convenient purchasing
Gravity die-cast iron for improved durability and performance
Flat base helps improve storage efficiency
Free shipping available
Cons
Just five weights per bundle
Max weight of 53 pounds
Some may prefer a more textured powdercoat
Material
Gravity die-cast iron, textured black powdercoat
Handle Diameter
32-39 mm (depending on weight total)
Weight Range
8-24 kg (18-53 lbs)
Weight Markings
Kilograms and pounds

The REP Fitness Kettlebell Set can be a convenient way to purchase multiple kettlebell weights in one fell swoop. You receive five varying weights in one bundle, and REP also offers dual-weight packages that can create paired bells for specific exercises like presses, carries, and more.

At a Glance 

  • Cast iron with textured powder coat
  • Available in single- or dual-weight packages for training versatility
  • Color-coded and clearly marked weights
  • Tight weight tolerances for consistent balance

The REP Fitness Kettlebell Set can be ideal for full-body kettlebell workouts since it includes a solid weight range of 8 kilograms (17.6 pounds) to 24 kilograms (52.9 pounds). Made from cast iron with a shiny, textured finish, each kettlebell has a color-coded handle for easy weight identification. With REP’s attention to detail and excellent engineering, this set earns a rock-solid 4-out-of-5 rating for value. Overall, the high-quality construction helps REP earn the nod as our consensus top pick. 

Durability: 5/5

A REP Fitness Kettlebell.
The gravity die-cast design results in a high-quality kettlebell that will hold up well over time.

Weight Options: 3/5

A range of REP Fitness Kettlebells at different weights.
Although this set only goes up to 53 pounds, there are still a good number of weights available to support a well-rounded fitness routine.

Construction: 5/5

A closeup shot of a REP Fitness Kettlebell.
We appreciate that each kettlebell includes embossed weight increment indications in both kilograms and pounds.

Why We Like the REP Fitness Kettlebell Set 

REP has earned a reputation for producing high-quality fitness equipment, and this kettlebell set is no different. As someone who’s used both budget-friendly and high-end models, I appreciate the gravity die-cast design, which helps produce a durable, precise kettlebell with a perfectly flat base. “The base really helps when trying to keep your home gym organized,” adds Ben Emminger, NASM-CNC, NASM-CSNC.

Each bell is labeled with both kilogram and pound weight increments, meaning you don’t have to worry about trying to do any complicated conversions in the middle of your training session. Overall, I give this set dual 5-out-of-5 scores for construction and durability. 

In addition, REP deserves a tip of the cap for providing free shipping. This is a big cost savings, especially when you’re buying an entire set of kettlebells. Combined with the fact that you can choose between a single or double set (offering dual weights of the same total for two-kettlebell movements), REP gets a 5-out-of-5 rating for purchasing and shipping. 

These REP kettlebells are a nice blend of performance and consistency. The handle is comfortable yet tacky, and I’d have no qualms about adding them to my home gym.

Ben Emminger, NASM-CNC, NASM-CSNC

Alternatives

Our main callout with the REP Fitness Kettlebell Set is the somewhat limited weight range. The heaviest kettlebell is 24 kilograms (roughly 53 pounds). This may suffice for beginners and intermediate trainees, but more advanced users will likely need to invest in a few more heavier bells for exercises like goblet squats or even swings. As a result, we rate the weight options for this specific set at 3 out of 5. 

Ben does note, though, that higher weights can be purchased independently, albeit with a little more time spent finalizing your online cart. “Think of this set as a great starting point,” he says. “Then if you need lighter or heavier profiles, just add them as à la carte items prior to checkout.”

Additionally, while we rate the durability with a perfect score, some customer reviews point out that the powder coating can begin to chip over time. This can be subjective depending on how much wear and tear you put these ‘bells through, but it is worth mentioning that these weights aren’t entirely impervious to deterioration.

If you need to go heavier, consider adding several GIANT Lifting V3 Kettlebells to your set.  

Testing Breakdown

Here’s how the REP Fitness Kettlebell Set fared based on our fitness equipment testing methodology. 

Overall Rating: 4.6/5

Construction – 5
Durability – 5
Handle – 5
Weight Options – 3
Purchasing/Shipping – 5
Overall Value – 4
Customer Service – 4
Customer Reviews – 4.8

Vs. The Average

You get a less expansive weight range with the REP Fitness Kettlebell Set. The median handle diameter falls right around the average.

REP Fitness Kettlebell SetAverage Kettlebell
PriceSingle Set: $360.99
Double Set: $704.99
Cheapest: $44.50
Most Expensive: $209.15
Weight Range8-24 kg (17.6-52.9 lbs)7-31.4 kg (15.6-69.3 lbs)
Handle Diameter32-39 mm, depending on the size34.87 mm

Best Kettlebell Set: Rogue E-Coat Kettlebells

Updated by: Amanda Capritto, CPT, CES, CF-L1, CNC, CSNC

Built to Last
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.35
Rogue E-Coat Kettlebells
5 weights per set
Gravity die-cast
Powdercoat finish
Free shipping available
30-day, money-back guarantee
Available in single- & dual-weight sets
Free shipping on select products See Details
E-Coat Finish
Electrocoating provides a durable, chip-resistant layer with smooth texture
Cast-In-One-Piece
Prevents seams or weak points for better balance and strength
Flat Machined Base
Ensures stability for push-ups, rows, and floor work
Consistent Weight
Tight manufacturing tolerances for uniform feel across weights
Pros
Durable e-coat resists chips and corrosion
Excellent balance and feel during swings and cleans
Smooth handle for comfortable grip, even barehanded
Made in the USA with consistent quality control
Cons
Slightly slick when sweaty without chalk
Pricier than budget cast-iron kettlebells
Limited color differentiation between weights
Heavier coating can affect tactile feedback for some users
Material
Single-piece ductile cast iron
Finish
Electrocoated (E-Coat) for corrosion resistance
Weight Range
9 lbs to 88 lbs
Handle Diameter
1.2″ (for lighter weights) to 1.5″ (for heavier models)

The Rogue E-Coat Kettlebells combine traditional cast-iron strength with a modern, durable finish that resists corrosion and chipping. Ideal for both home and commercial gyms, these kettlebells deliver consistent balance, long-lasting performance, and premium feel—making them a top choice for serious strength athletes and home gym enthusiasts alike.

At a Glance 

  • E-coat cast iron for a smooth, durable finish
  • Weight range of 9 to 88 pounds
  • Balanced handle and flat base for easier storage
  • Consistent casting and sizing across all weights

Earning an impressive overall score of 4.35 out of 5, the Rogue E-Coat series has everything we look for in the best kettlebells. Featuring a cast iron core and durable e-coat finish, you shouldn’t have to worry about damaging them with repeated drops. Well-built and priced fairly, we’re confident the E-Coat kettlebells can quickly become staples in your home gym. One of the best parts? They’re available in a variety of set configurations to suit the needs of different athletes, making them our pick for the best kettlebell set.

Construction: 5/5

Rogue E-Coat kettlebell on the floor in front of a product tester
The use of single-piece ductile cast iron and an e-coat finish creates a kettlebell that is highly durable.

Handle: 4/5

Product tester performing a single-arm overhead press with the Rogue E-Coat kettlebell
The handle is comfortable for both one- and two-handed exercises, according to our tester. 

Value: 4/5

Product tester performs a biceps curl with the Rogue E-Coat Kettlebell
Between the build quality and diverse weight options, the E-Coat kettlebells offer rock-solid value.

Why We Like Rogue E-Coat Kettlebells

After using many Rogue kettlebells over the years, GGR founder Coop Mitchell puts it bluntly, “By far, the E-Coat line is my favorite.”

GGR product tester Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC also got a chance to test these, and he says he can see why Coop is such a big fan. E-coats are highly durable and resistant to chipping, scratching, and rusting. They also make for a stronger grip on the kettlebell. The Rogue E-Coat Kettlebell is also made from ductile cast iron, which offers more durability and resistance to corrosion than standard cast iron or steel. As such, durability shouldn’t be a concern with these ‘bells, and we give them a 5-out-of-5 rating in this all-important category.

There are 12 available weight increments in the E-Coat line ranging from 9 to 88 pounds. This can give you plenty of flexibility for progressive overload since you can purchase heavier kettlebells as you get stronger. We rate the weight options at a perfect 5 out of 5, especially since you can also purchase these kettlebells in various sets, including a 26-35-70-pound set for $226 or a 10-piece set ranging from 9 to 70 pounds for $625.

I would choose the E-Coat after testing them over powder-coated or regular kettlebells. 

GGR Everything Lead reviewer Lindsay Scheele, CPT, CNC

Alternatives

While I had no complaints about the diameter or shape of the handle, I docked a point off the score (4 out of 5) because the e-coat finish can make it a bit more challenging to maintain control of the kettlebell when your hands get sweaty. This might not be a concern if you’re just using a kettlebell for a few exercises, but it could be problematic if you’re into high-intensity interval training (HIIT) where you can break a serious sweat. 

In addition, Coop points out that because these are not competition kettlebells, there may be some very slight discrepancies in weight. That’s typical of most non-competition kettlebells, however, so don’t necessarily take this as a shot at Rogue. 

If you don’t want the e-coat finish, you might want to choose the Titan Competition Style Kettlebells instead. These kettlebells have a smooth coating profile as well as the universal sizing of competition-grade bells.  

Testing Breakdown

Here’s how the Rogue E-Coat Kettlebells scored based on our fitness equipment testing methodology. 

Overall Rating: 4.35/5

Construction – 5
Durability – 5
Handle – 4
Weight Options – 5
Purchasing/Shipping – 3
Overall Value – 4
Customer Service – 5
Customer Reviews – 4

Vs. The Average

The Rogue E-Coat Kettlebells are generally more affordable than the average kettlebell. They also offer a higher weight range. 

Rogue E-Coat KettlebellsAverage Kettlebell
Price RangeCheapest: $44 
Most expensive: $163
Cheapest: $44.50
Most Expensive: $209.15
Weight Range9-88 lbs7-31.4 kg (15.6-69.3 lbs)
Handle Diameter30.48-38.1 mm34.87 mm

Check out our full Rogue E-Coat Kettlebell review for more information.

Best Competition Kettlebell: Titan Competition Style Kettlebells

Updated by: Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC

Competition-Standard Design, Great Value
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.4
Titan Competition Style Kettlebells
Steel cast
Competition style
Affordable
Free shipping on all orders
Flexible payment options
1-year warranty
Save up to 65% sitewide See Details
Dimensions
8.3″ in diameter, 11.4″ tall
Weight Range
8-32 kg (18-70.5 lbs)
Handle Diameter
35 mm
Construction
hollow core steel
Pros of the Titan Fitness Competition Style Kettlebell
Priced well
Non-welded handles
13 options between 8 and 32 kg
Steel cast with powder coat finish
Cons of the Titan Fitness Competition Style Kettlebell
Weight only listed in kilos
Heaviest weight is 32 kg
Reports of paint chipping
Dimensions
8.3″ in diameter, 11.4″ tall
Materials
Steel cast with powder coat finish
Options
13 different sizes (8-32 kg)

Titan Fitness Competition Style Kettlebells are designed with the same dimensions so you can focus on your form as your progress. Sold individually, they have color-coded handles that make it easy to identify the weight. They’re a solid option, but be aware that some customers have reported issues with the paint chipping.

At a Glance 

  • Uniform steel build with color coding
  • 8- to 32-kilogram, competition-standard range
  • 35-millimeter handle for consistent feel
  • Matte finish for enhanced grip

Titan Competition Style Kettlebells can deliver pro-level performance at a more affordable price than high-end options. Each bell meets international standards for size, shape, and handle diameter, allowing for seamless transitions between at-home training and the competition floor. The consistent design also enables smooth transitions between weight totals without disrupting your technique. We also appreciate that these are color-coded and laser-engraved for easy weight identification, leading to a strong construction score of 4.5 out of 5.

Construction: 4.5/5

Man holding onto titan fitness kettlebell
These Titan kettlebells have a consistent shape and handle diameter that makes them easy to use.

Handle: 5/5

Close shot of the handle on the Titan Fitness Competition Style Kettlebell
Each handle has the same diameter of 35 millimeters and is comfortable to grip.

Weight Options: 3/5

Multiple Titan Fitness Competition Style Kettlebells lined up next to each other
We docked points off the weight options rating because these only go up to 32 kilograms (70.5 pounds). 

Why We Like Titan Competition Style Kettlebells

Because this is a competition kettlebell, the weights are highly accurate and the handles are a standard 35 millimeters on every bell. “It’s nice to have this standardized handle across the range,” notes Ben Emminger, NASM-CNC, NASM-CSNC. “It helps you maintain consistent form regardless of your working weight.”

We also really like that each bell comes in its own color, which can be a nice alternative to your typical black, iron-cast kettlebell. Between the build quality and affordable pricing, we rate the value at 5 out of 5.

Meanwhile, budget-conscious buyers will also appreciate that Titan offers free shipping on all orders, which is a huge cost efficiency that many other brands do not offer. That earns a perfect 5-out-of-5 rating for purchasing and shipping (and a big tip of the cap for customer service). So, if you want to stock up on several competition-style bells, you can do so without having to worry about escalating shipping costs.

I’ve used these Titan ‘bells a handful of times at various gyms. The comfort is top-notch when working through certain movements, and each free weight is as rock-solid as ever, even despite varying levels of wear and tear.

Ben Emminger, NASM-CNC, NASM-CSNC

Alternatives

As a budget option, Titan Competition Kettlebells do have some issues, namely with the paint. Several reviewers have reported flaking or chipping, and Ben can attest. “While it’s more of a cosmetic flaw than a structural compromise,” he states, “These kettlebells can quickly look worn-in given the thinner paint that chips easily.” While this doesn’t typically affect the performance of the product, it can affect aesthetics. We docked some points off the durability score, resulting in a 3.5-out-of-5 rating.

Also, most competition bells like this one don’t come in heavy weights because people don’t really use higher totals in competition. Even though we only give this a 3 out of 5 for weight options, we still think it delivers good value for the price.

If you prefer to use an adjustable kettlebell over multiple kettlebells, the REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebells are some of our favorite on the market.

Testing Breakdown

The Titan Competition Style Kettlebells scored at least a 4 out of 5 in all but two categories. Here’s a complete breakdown of our ratings:

Overall Rating: 4.4/5

Construction – 4.5
Durability – 3.5
Handle – 5
Weight Options – 3
Purchasing/Shipping – 5
Overall Value – 5
Customer Service – 4.5
Customer Reviews – 4.73

Vs. The Average

The Titan Competition Style Kettlebells have essentially the same handle diameter and weight range as the average kettlebell.

Titan Competition Style KettlebellsAverage Kettlebell
Price RangeCheapest: $84.99 
Most Expensive: $184.99
Cheapest: $44.50
Most Expensive: $209.15
Weight Range8-32 kg (17.6-70.6 lbs)7-31.4 kg (15.6-69.3 lbs)
Handle Diameter35 mm34.87 mm

Best Adjustable Kettlebell: REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebells

Updated by: Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC

Quick Adjustments With a Traditional Feel
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.7
REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebells
Traditional feel
Durable
Adjustable
Free shipping
Payment plans available
Lifetime warranty
Free shipping on every order See Details
Weight Range
8-16 kg, 16-24 kg, or 20-40 lbs
Handle Diameter
34.6-35 mm, depending on the size
Shape
Competition-style shape
Adjustable
Push-and-twist adjustment mechanism
Pros of REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebells
Feels like a regular kettlebell
Weights are quick and easy to change
Weight adjusts to 24 kg
Rubber bottom helps protect flooring
Offered in kilograms and pounds
Cons of REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebells
Plastic changing mechanism could break
Would prefer a broader weight range in one kettlebell
Handle Diameter
34.6-35 mm, depending on the size
Materials
Cast-iron with matte black finish
Weight Options
5 per kettlebell
Weight Ranges
8-16 kg, 16-24 kg, or 20-40 lbs

If you close your eyes (although we don’t advise it because kettlebells are heavy) when using the REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebells, you will think that you are using a regular kettlebell. The adjustment mechanism works quickly and efficiently, allowing you to make seamless transitions during your workouts.

At a Glance 

  • Steel design with quick-change plates
  • Adjustable 8-24 kg (16-40 lb) range
  • Competition-style handle
  • Secure locking system prevents rattling

The best adjustable kettlebells allow you to save money and space. If you’re looking to preserve real estate and keep some extra money in your pocket, I recommend investing in a REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebell. Earning an impressive overall score of 4.7 out of 5, this is a high-quality option that can give you the flexibility to train light, heavy, or anywhere in between. 

Construction: 4.5/5

A REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebell is held next to a weight plate.
These kettlebells are made with a competition-style handle for ultimate control. 

Adjustment Speed: 5/5

Adjusting the REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebell.
The push-and-twist mechanism lets you make seamless weight changes during your workout.

Weight Options: 4/5

Our tester does a high pull with the REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebell.
You can choose from three models, each offering different weight capacities for more targeted training.

Why We Like REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebells

GGR founder Cooper Mitchell has used these REP adjustable kettlebells for a variety of exercises, including swings, farmer’s carries, Turkish get-ups, and goblet squats. He’s been impressed by the overall build quality and ease of use, rating the construction at a near-perfect 4.5 out of 5. 

Depending on your experience level, you can choose between an 8- to 16-kilogram option, a 16- to 24-kilogram option, or a 20- to 40-pound option. While we’d like to see a broader weight range within one kettlebell, we still rate it at 4 out of 5 for weight options. Most importantly, you can make quick weight changes mid-workout. Coop rated it at 5 out of 5, noting, “All you have to do is use a push-and-twist dial on top to easily find the exact weight you need.”

I like that these are useful for both beginners and experienced lifters.

GGR founder Cooper Mitchell

Alternatives

During testing, Coop found that the weight plates inside rattled a little, which can be unnerving. However, none of the plates fell out or came loose. Overall, this is a well-built adjustable kettlebell that should work for most users. My only caveat here is that advanced users may not get enough of a challenge from a bell that “only” goes up to 53 pounds.

If you need an adjustable kettlebell with a higher weight capacity, consider the Ironmaster Quick-Lock Adjustable Kettlebell Handle, which supports up to 80 pounds. 

Testing Breakdown

The REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebells scored at least a 4 out of 5 in every category. Here’s a detailed breakdown:

Overall Rating: 4.7/5

Construction – 4.5
Durability – 4.5
Adjustment Speed – 5
Weight Options – 4
Shape – 5
Handle Quality – 5
Overall Value – 4
Customer Service – 5
Customer Reviews – 4.9

Vs. The Average

REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebells feature roughly the same weight range as your average adjustable kettlebell, and the slightly thicker handle can help improve control during certain movements. 

REP Fitness Adjustable KettlebellAverage Adjustable Kettlebells
PriceCheapest: $149.99
Most Expensive: $219.99
$165
Weight Range8-16 kg; 16-24 kg; 20-40 lbs8-20 kg (17.6-44 lbs)
Weight Increment2 kg (4.4 lbs), or 5 lbs2 kg (4.4 lbs)
Replaces5 kettlebells8 kettlebells
Handle Diameter34.6 mm33 mm
Adjustment MechanismPush-and-twist dialVaries
MaterialsCast iron shell with matte powder coatVaries
WarrantyLifetime4 years

For more details, check out our REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebell review.

Best Kettlebell for Beginners: GIANT Lifting V3 Kettlebells

Updated by: Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC

User-Friendly and Ultra-Versatile
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.62
GIANT Lifting V3 Kettlebells
Ultra-durable
Gravity die casting
Single mold
Free shipping
HSA/FSA eligible
1-year warranty
Up to 35% off | Use GGR for add’l 5% off See Details
Material
Powder-coated iron
Weight Range
4 kg/9 lbs – 48 kg/106 lbs
Handle Diameter
30-40 mm
Weight Markings
Kilograms and Pounds
Pros of the Giant Lifting V3 Kettlebell
Sold individually or in sets
Color-coded handles
Powder coated for grip and corrosion resistance
Shows weights in kilograms and pounds
Single mold, which increases durability
Cons of the Giant Lifting V3 Kettlebell
Somewhat expensive
Materials
Die gravity cast iron with powder-coated finish
Handle Diameter
30-40 mm
Weight Range
4 kg/9 lbs – 48 kg/106 lbs
Price
Under $3 per pound

The Giant Lifting V3 Kettlebells are a durable set of kettlebells that come with color-coded handles for easy weight identification. Available in a wide range of weights, they’re well-suited for lifters of all experience levels.

What Our Tester Says: 

“You get a great grip with this, and it feels like the coating can take a beating along with your workout. The black powder coating is helpful with sweaty hands.”

At a Glance 

  • Solid cast iron with matte powder coat
  • 4- to 48-kilogram range for easy progression
  • Smooth handles help reduce hand fatigue
  • Flat base for stability and storage

The GIANT Lifting V3 Kettlebells are ideal for beginner kettlebell workouts due to their straightforward design and wide range of weight options (13 choices between 4 and 48 kilograms). The powdercoat finish provides a solid, comfortable grip that helps prevent any slipping—something that’s especially important when you’re learning new kettlebell exercises. Earning an impressive overall score of 4.62 out of 5, these bells should work well for users of all experience levels.

Durability: 5/5

Giant Lifting V3 Kettlebell on a Titan Fitness plyo box
GIANT uses a gravity die-cast process to create a strong, smooth, durable kettlebell.

Handle: 5/5

Product tester Stephen Sheehan holding a 24-kg Giant Lifting V3 Kettlebell by the handle in his left hand
The powdercoat finish on the handle allows you to maintain excellent control throughout each movement.

Weight Options: 5/5

Product tester Stephen Sheehan curling the Giant Lifting V3 kettlebell
GIANT offers a wide range of options as light as 9 pounds or as heavy as 106 pounds. 

Why We Like GIANT Lifting V3 Kettlebells

I got my hands on the V3 Kettlebells shortly after they hit the market, and let’s just say I came away mightily impressed. From a design standpoint, they check every box. In addition to color-coded handles, there are markings for both pounds and kilograms. They also have a flat base for easier storage. The construction easily earns a perfect 5 out of 5. 

Most importantly, these bells performed well across multiple exercises. I had no trouble maintaining control for kettlebell curls and overhead presses. Ditto for two-handed exercises like goblet squats and swings. Although we didn’t have access to a wide range of weights during testing, beginners can buy a few of the lighter ‘bells to get started before progressing to heavier totals. With sizes ranging from 9 pounds to 106 pounds, GIANT gets a 5-out-of-5 rating for weight options. 

These look, feel, and perform like high-end kettlebells that I’d be willing to invest in.

GGR Senior Staff Writer Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC

Alternatives

From a design and performance perspective, I have zero complaints about the V3 Kettlebells. Perhaps the only drawback here—and it’s a fairly notable one—is the price. The lightest option (9 lbs) costs $35, while the heaviest option (106 lbs) costs $277.78. These certainly aren’t the most expensive kettlebells on the market, but they’re not as budget-friendly as something like the Yes4All powder-coated kettlebells, where the 9-pound model costs just $19.52. 

Another related callout: GIANT only covers these kettlebells with a one-year warranty. That’s another reason why we gave a 3-out-of-5 value rating. 

If you need something more budget-friendly, check out the Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells.

Testing Breakdown

The GIANT Lifting V3 Kettlebells earned perfect scores across five categories. Other than the price, it’s hard to knock much against them. 

Overall Rating: 4.62/5

Construction – 5
Durability – 5
Handle – 5
Weight Options – 5
Purchasing/Shipping – 5
Overall Value – 3
Customer Service – 4
Customer Reviews – 4.99

Vs. The Average

The GIANT Lifting Kettlebells are more expensive than the average kettlebell when you go for heavier options. You do, however, get a more expansive weight range.

GIANT Lifting V3 KettlebellsAverage Kettlebell
PriceCheapest: $35 
Most Expensive: $277.78
Cheapest: $44.50
Most Expensive: $209.15
Weight Range4-48 kg (9-106 lbs)7-31.4 kg (15.6-69.3 lbs)
Handle Diameter30-40 mm, depending on the size34.87 mm

Best Budget Kettlebell: Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells

Updated by: Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC

Affordable and Reliable 
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
3.85
Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells
Smaller handle
Affordable
Beginner-friendly
Amazon Prime shipping
30-day return
1-year warranty
Weight Range
5-90 lbs
Handle Diameter
40 mm
Construction
Cast iron with vinyl coating
Weight Markings
Kilograms and pounds
Pros of Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells
Comfortable for those with smaller hands
Free Prime shipping
Highly affordable
30-day return policy
Cons of Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells
Made of lightweight plastic
Not available in heavier sizes
Smoother handle not the best for grip
Handle Diameter
40 mm
Materials
Vinyl-coated cast iron
Weight Options
5-90 lbs
Dimensions
‎9.06″ L x 6.5″ W x 10.04″ H

Yes4All kettlebells certainly aren’t on the same level as some of the other contenders in this lineup, but they’re affordable and a great option if you’re just starting your fitness journey. Most importantly, if you have small hands, you should have no trouble maintaining control during your exercise routine.

At a Glance 

  • Cast-iron core with vinyl coating
  • Robust weight range (5 lbs to 90 lbs)
  • Wide, textured handle for grip
  • Flat bottom for safe floor use

If you’re trying to minimize costs while maximizing gains, the Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells are your best bet. You can find these budget-friendly bells on Amazon or even Walmart at affordable prices, making them a wise investment for beginners who want to get comfortable with kettlebell training. From a value perspective, these earn a strong 4-out-of-5 rating.  

Value: 4/5

A man and woman working out using Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells
The budget-friendly price tag and free Amazon Prime shipping help these kettlebells earn a strong value score.

Weight Options: 5/5

A storage rack with various sizes of Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells
There’s no shortage of weight options with the Yes4All kettlebells, as you can go as light as 5 pounds or as heavy as 90.

Construction: 2.5/5

A 20-pound Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebell
The plastic coating and smooth handle don’t measure up to the materials used on higher-quality kettlebells.

Why We Like Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells

Although we haven’t tested this particular kettlebell profile yet, we have tried some of Yes4All’s other products. This is a kettlebell that, as we like to say, “Gets the job done.” The weight tolerance is pretty on point, there are good weight options, and it’s coated in plastic, which isn’t our favorite, but it does offer some protection for your home gym as well as rust resistance. We rate the weight options at a perfect 5 out of 5, too, as you can go as light as 5 pounds or as heavy as 90. This allows you to perform just about any exercise with a safe amount of weight while still giving you room to progress. 

Although these are by no means the most high-quality bells on the market, you get great value. In addition to their affordable price, you can score free shipping if you’re an Amazon Prime member—a nice bonus for anyone looking to build a collection of budget home gym equipment and one of the reasons we gave a 5-out-of-5 rating for purchasing and shipping. Based on my experience with similar Yes4All kettlebells, I’d be more than happy investing in a few different sizes and using these for strength training. 

If you’re looking for just a simple free weight that can get the job done, these Yes4All kettlebells can suffice. Any higher expectations, though, and it may be wise to invest a little more in your home gym setup.

Ben Emminger, NASM-CNC, NASM-CSNC

Alternatives

Budget-friendly can mean lower quality, and that’s admittedly the case here. Compared to higher-end options from well-recognized brands like Rogue and REP Fitness, the Yes4All kettlebells have a cheaper look and feel. For one, the handle is a bit smoother, leaving room for slippage that can’t be adjusted with added chalk. That’s not to say these are guaranteed to cause broken windows, but you should be a little more cognizant of your grip when swinging these. From a construction standpoint, these earn a 2.5 out of 5, as they’re nowhere near the top of the line in build quality.

That build quality can also rear its head when it comes to actual weight totals. According to some online customer reviews, there have been noted inaccuracies between listed and actual weights. Granted, you get what you pay for, and the inconsistencies aren’t astronomical, but if you value precision in your home gym equipment, it may be best to invest more in your gear.

If you’re willing to spend more on something far more durable, we recommend the Rogue E-Coat Kettlebells.

Testing Breakdown

The Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells didn’t score as well in terms of construction or durability compared to other models we tested. However, you get good bang for your buck and ample weight choices.

Overall Rating: 3.85/5

Construction – 2.5
Durability – 2.5
Handle – 3
Weight Options – 5
Purchasing/Shipping – 5
Overall Value – 4
Customer Service – 3.5
Customer Reviews – 4.8

Vs. The Average

The Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells are substantially cheaper than the average kettlebell. You also can go heavier, as there are options available up to 90 pounds.

Yes4All Vinyl Coated KettlebellsAverage Kettlebell
Price RangeCheapest: $19.52
Most Expensive: $149.38
Cheapest: $44.50
Most Expensive: $209.15
Weight Range5-90 lbs7-31.4 kg (15.6-69.3 lbs)
Handle DiameterNot listed34.87 mm

Best Powder-Coated Kettlebell: Iron Bull Kettlebell

Updated by: Stephen Sheehan, CPT, CNC

Heavy Duty With Even Finish
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.5
Iron Bull Kettlebell
Solid cast iron
Color-coded
Ultra-durable
Free shipping for U.S. domestic orders over $150
Klarna (interest-free payments)
Limited lifetime
Up to 10% off + free shipping on large purchases See Details
Weight Range
4-40 kg (9-88 lbs)
Handle Diameter
30-40 mm, depending on the weight
Construction
Single piece of cast iron with powdercoat finish
Weight Markings
Kilograms and pounds
Pros of Iron Bull Kettlebells
Durable
Powder-coated
Color-coded for easy identification
30-day money back guarantee
Cons of Iron Bull Kettlebells
Handles may feel too thick for some
Only sold in singles
Handle Diameter
30-40 mm, depending on the weight
Materials
Solid cast iron with powdercoat finish
Options
11 different sizes (4-40 kg)

The Iron Bull Kettlebells are constructed with durable cast iron and finished with a powder coating for added durability and longevity. Available in weight options ranging from 4 to 88 pounds and color-coded for easy identification, these kettlebells are a solid choice for any home gym owner.

At a Glance 

  • Heavy-duty cast iron with powder coat
  • 4- to 40-kilogram weight range
  • Machined flat base for easier storage
  • Balanced handle for smooth swings

The Iron Bull Kettlebells have a smooth, even powder coating that can make them easier to grip and less likely to become a danger to you and your workout partners. The colored bands on the handle aren’t just for show—they let you know the weight of the kettlebell, which is also printed in kilograms and pounds on the face. And with a wide range that extends to 88 pounds, these earn a perfect 5 out of 5 for weight options.

Construction: 4.5/5

A set of Iron Bull kettlebells on gym flooring
Each Iron Bull Kettlebell is made from a single piece of cast iron to create an ultra-durable product.

Handle: 4.5/5

Man performs sumo deadlifts with the Iron Bull Kettlebell
The powdercoat finish and handle design allow you to maintain total control during your workouts.

Value: 4/5

A man performs a one-arm kettlebell swing with the Iron Bull Kettlebell
Although these aren’t the most budget-friendly bells, the build quality justifies the price.

Why We Like Iron Bull Kettlebell

From a design standpoint, these kettlebells have a thick, ergonomic handle that’s easy and comfortable to grip and wide enough to allow you to perform two-handed exercises. We rate the handle at 4.5 out of 5, especially since the heavier bells have a wider diameter for more control. “To me, the wider handle helps you focus on grip control,” states Ben Emminger, NASM-CNC, NASM-CSNC. “Plus, I’m really only using heavier totals for deadlifts and carries, so the extra challenge can be a nice supplemental perk.”

Furthermore, the powder coat finish adds to the aesthetic and performance of these kettlebells. Having used kettlebells with different coatings, I can attest that something like the Iron Bull will allow you to maintain superior control, even when your palms get sweaty. These also hold chalk well, according to Ben. “That’s a big plus if you’re looking to crush some kettlebell CrossFit exercises,” he states.

I do appreciate the handle design, not only for its impressive powdercoat but for the window between the bell and grip. You can comfortably manage two-handed movements with a variety of weight profiles.

Ben Emminger, NASM-CNC, NASM-CSNC

Alternatives

Unfortunately, Iron Bull only sells these kettlebells in singles, and most of the bells cost anywhere between $2 and $3 per pound (some a little more than $3). On the bright side, you get a 30-day, money-back guarantee, and there are financing options available through Klarna. That’s enticing enough to earn a 4 out of 5 for value, especially given the build quality of the Iron Bulls.

We’ll also call attention to the handle diameter that ranges from 30 to 40 millimeters, depending on your chosen weight. The thicker handles, while a boost to your kettlebell control, may be difficult to grip for those with smaller digits. It’s something to keep in mind if you plan on ordering high-weight profiles right out of the gate.

These are a bit pricey, so if you want to save a little money, the Yes4All Vinyl Coated Kettlebells are a more affordable option that we still like and recommend.

Testing Breakdown

The Iron Bull Kettlebell received one of the highest overall scores of any kettlebell we’ve tested. Here’s a closer look by category:

Overall Rating: 4.5/5

Construction – 4.5
Durability – 4.5
Handle – 4.5
Weight Options – 5
Purchasing/Shipping – 4
Overall Value – 4
Customer Service – 4.5
Customer Reviews – 5

Vs. The Average

The Iron Bull Kettlebell is available in heavier sizes than the average kettlebell. The cheapest option is right on par with the average cost, as well. 

Iron Bull KettlebellAverage Kettlebell
Price RangeCheapest: $45
Most Expensive: $265
Cheapest: $44.50
Most Expensive: $209.15
Weight Range4-40 kg (9-88 lbs)7-31.4 kg (15.6-69.3 lbs)
Handle Diameter30-40 mm, depending on the weight34.87 mm

Other Kettlebells We Researched and Tested

We have a fever, and the only prescription is more kettlebells. Luckily for us, the GGR team has tested dozens of kettlebells over the past few years. Here are a few we’ve had our hands on that you might want to consider:

  • Rogue Rubber Coated Kettlebells: These are a great option if you want to protect your floors, especially if you drop your kettlebells fairly often. Unfortunately, they’re not offered in many sizes.
  • Bells of Steel Adjustable Competition Style Kettlebell: Made from a steel, powder-coated outer shell with iron plates, this adjustable kettlebell goes from 26 pounds to 45 pounds. However, we only rated it a 2 out of 5 for adjustment speed. As a result, we went with the more time-efficient REP Fitness Adjustable Kettlebell for this roundup.
  • Kettlebell Kings Powder Coat Kettlebells: Offering a wide range of weight options, these powder-coated kettlebells carry a premium price tag. While we appreciate the precise weight accuracy and overall build quality, the cost may be too steep for more budget-conscious buyers.  

How We Picked and Tested The Best Kettlebells

To find the best kettlebells for your home gym, we looked at every option available on the market today and graded them based on the following criteria:

Construction and Durability

Kettlebells are expensive, so we want to make sure the ones you purchase will last a while. The coating should also not chip easily. The kettlebell should be made with high-quality materials that result in consistent durability and performance. To earn a 3 out of 5, the bell should be made of solid metal but may have minor imperfections, such as a slightly uneven base.

Weight Options

What weight range do the kettlebells come in? Some users may need heavier options for advanced movements. Others may need lighter weights as they embark on their kettlebell training journey. We give at least a 3 out of 5 if there’s a broad range of options that can cater to users of different strength and experience levels. 

Handle

It’s very easy to have an accident with a kettlebell, especially during swings—whether that means dropping it or having it slip out of your hands. So, we wanted to make sure the handles on these options allowed for a good grip.

We assess the diameter, finish, and how well you can maintain control during different movements. To earn at least a 3 out of 5, you should have no issues with slippage, and you should be able to grip the kettlebell comfortably.

Value

Is the kettlebell worth its price? Or, rather, can you get a better bang for your buck elsewhere? Some companies sell bundled kettlebell sets, which allow you to save money. In other cases, you may get better value by investing in a single adjustable kettlebell. A value score of 3 out of 5 means the kettlebells are priced fairly but not so much that you’re getting a tremendous bargain.

Warranty, Financing, Returns

As with any piece of home gym equipment, you should make sure the kettlebell has some type of warranty, any available financing options, and that you can return the product if you find you’re not a fan of it. A 3-out-of-5 rating represents a solid but limited warranty (typically around one year) with a standard return policy (typically around 30 days).

Woman performs a sumo deadlift using the Bells of Steel Adjustable Kettlebell
Our tester training with a competition-style kettlebell

Benefits of Kettlebell Training

The kettlebell is the king of being an all-in-one tool for conditioning. With a flat bottom and curved bell, the uneven distribution of weight can create an incredibly effective platform for cardio and weight training exercises. Some of the many kettlebell benefits include the following:

Well-Rounded Fitness

You work on several different aspects of fitness when doing kettlebell exercises: endurance, strength, flexibility, and balance, among others. In other words, you get a lot of bang for your buck.

“For exercise to be considered strength or resistance training, it must challenge your muscles to the point where they adapt and become stronger,” says Dr. Christopher Mohr, PhD, RD.

When you invest in the best home gym equipment, it’s key to find a single piece that offers versatility. With a kettlebell, you can work on:

  • Core strength
  • Stability
  • Coordination and body awareness
  • Cardio
  • Upper and lower body strength
  • Glute strength

Clearly, a kettlebell can give you a chance to work on a multitude of modalities. But heed this piece of advice from Dr. Raj Dasgupta, MD, FACP, FCCP, FAASM. 

“With whatever exercise you decide to indulge in, try to be consistent, as it can have positive effects on your mental health over time, too,” he explains.

RELATED: Upper Body Kettlebell Workout

Cardio Without Running

Going for a run is great, but I also love it when I can get my heart rate up while using some kind of weight. Kettlebells can be amazing for cardio workouts that include high-intensity intervals as well as low-weight, high-rep options. The Journal of Strength and Conditioning Research1 even found in a 2015 study that four weeks of high-intensity kettlebell snatch training helped increase aerobic capacity of collegiate soccer players.

Of course, there’s nothing wrong with using running workouts to improve your cardiovascular fitness. However, kettlebell training can offer an alternative way to improve your aerobic capacity.

“There’s no ‘best’ type of exercise,” says Dr. Mohr. “The best is the one you’ll enjoy and continue with.”

Helps Develop Explosive Strength

A 2024 comprehensive review2 speaks on the benefits of resistance training with kettlebells. Not only does it help produce and develop strength and endurance, but it also develops explosive strength, or power.

Weightlifters, runners, and other athletes look to the kettlebell to build explosive strength. Exercises like kettlebell swings engage the hips and posterior chain to create power. The kind of explosive energy the hips create is key to activities like sprinting, jumping, and weightlifting movements like the snatch.

Helps Strengthen Your Grip

You’ll be opening pickle jars in no time! Okay, I can’t make that promise, but I can tell you that kettlebells can be a great way to build grip strength.

Don’t believe me? A clinical trial in 20223 showed adults were able to improve grip strength in both hands over a three-month period by taking part in high-intensity hardstyle kettlebell training.

GGR writer Stephen Sheehan lifting an Ironmaster Quick-Lock adjustable kettlebell.
Our tester performing a curl with an Ironmaster Quick-Lock adjustable kettlebell

The kettlebell’s center of gravity is about 6 to 8 inches away from your palm, which means that the weight itself is unbalanced in your hands. This makes your gripping muscles (like the forearms and wrists) work harder while you perform just about any exercise with the bell. Kettlebells are also great for actual grip-strengthening exercises like farmers’ carries.

Safe Exercise

I don’t like to say that certain strength training exercises are dangerous or risky. After all, anything you do carries a risk with it. But, when compared to, say, putting a 300-pound barbell on your back and squatting it, the kettlebell exercise appears to carry a little less risk.

Lifting heavy weights has its place, and I’m here for it, but if that’s something that scares you, kettlebell workouts can be a safe alternative. You can still build muscle and power without doing something that may cause you some anxiety. To minimize your risk of injury,, you want to keep a strong, controlled grip across the weight. You should also choose a weight total that provides a bit of a challenge but can be moved without compromising your form.

“For beginners, it’s smart to start with lighter weights and focus on mastering the correct form,” says Dr. Mohr. “As your strength improves, you can gradually increase the weight and it’s important to push and challenge yourself.” 

Buying Guide: What to Look For In the Best Kettlebells

The best kettlebell for you will depend on multiple factors, including what type of kettlebell you want, what type of exercise you plan on doing, and your fitness levels. To start, let’s get familiar with the two main types of standard kettlebells:

GGR founder Coop Mitchell posing with a range of kettlebells.
A range of adjustable kettlebells we’ve tested in our GGR headquarters

Cast Iron Kettlebells

When most people picture a kettlebell, this is what they see. The handle on solid cast iron kettlebells is flared out. The coating on these varies, as well. Most commercial gyms carry this kind of bell, which is great for recreational lifting, two-handed movements, and beginners. The diameter of the bell and its handle usually increases as the weight goes up, so people with larger hands will want to go heavier than someone with smaller hands.

Competition Kettlebells

These bells are made to competition standards with a 35-millimeter handle that does not exceed the width of the bell itself. This narrow grip is useful for the one-handed movements you might see in a competition. Mostly, the people who use a competition kettlebell will be people who are competing (as the name suggests) but they could still work for the everyday athlete.

Once you have an idea of the type of bell you want, you may also want to consider:

Type of Exercise

Kettlebell training is so incredibly versatile. You have endless options for kettlebell movements, most of which will fall into one of two categories:

  • Ballistic lifts: These are explosive movements like kettlebell swings, snatches and cleans.
  • Grind lifts: These are either more skill- or strength-based movements, like overhead presses, deadlifts, and Turkish get-ups.

Once you ascertain how you will use the workout equipment, you can make other key decisions about factors like the weight you will need, the material you want, and the ergonomics of the bell.

Weight

Kettlebells come in a large variety of weight options, ranging from just a few pounds to literally hundreds of pounds. The lighter weights can be great for certain grind movements like Turkish get-ups and overhead pressing. Moderate to heavier weights are useful in building explosive strength through full-body movements like swings and snatches.

Another consideration: Kettlebell weights are often listed in kilograms. You’ll find kilos used on competition bells because kilos are the universal weight measurement. Ultimately, it doesn’t really matter if you pick a bell in pounds or in kilos unless you need a very specific weight range for your training purposes.

Grip

Kettlebells are literally bell-shaped weights with a wide handle across the top. Competition kettlebells all have a uniform handle size because they have to match the competition standard of 35 millimeters This will typically fit most adult hands just fine, but for people with smaller hands or youth athletes, 35 millimeters may not be a comfortable grip.

Cast iron kettlebells tend to have different grip sizes that vary with the weight of the bell. Therefore, a 12-kilogram kettlebell may have a smaller grip and be better suited for smaller athletes. Having a secure grip is vital for safety while exercising.

Handle

Aside from how thin or thick the grip is, the kettlebell handle itself should be relatively smooth. Sometimes, the casting process leaves behind remnants. This can quickly destroy your hands and ruin your workout. Look for a ‘bell that has a relatively smooth handle that still offers sufficient grip and friction from the powdercoat. 

Coating

Kettlebells that are cast iron typically have some kind of coating. This can help increase the durability of the equipment by preventing rust, corrosion, and scratches. Options include:

  • Powder Coating: This is a hard coating that is more protective than a simple coat of paint. Many powder-coated kettlebells have a matte finish because it gives you a better grip on the bell. Athletes also find that matte finishes help hold chalk, which can aid in grip.
  • Rubber or Vinyl Coating: Some people are attracted to rubber and vinyl-coated kettlebells because they are a little more aesthetically pleasing due to their smooth appearance. A coating like this may be gentler on your flooring and less noisy, too. However, rubber and vinyl can be worn down, chip, and crack over extended use.
  • E-Coating: Arguably, an “e-coat” is the best type of high-quality coating you could want on a kettlebell. Essentially, an electrical current coats the bell with paint to a certain desired thickness. E-coats last longer than powder coats, but they’re often more expensive. Also, there are different degrees of e-coating, so look for “military-grade” e-coating if you’re going with this option.

Durability

Kettlebells are a fairly durable piece of equipment, but some can stand up to abuse better than others. If you’re someone who plans on using kettlebells often, make sure it’ll last and not break on you within a couple of months. Look for features that signal durability, such as a single-piece cast iron or steel construction (rather than kettlebells with welded handles) and a tough powder-coated or e-coated finish that resists chips, rust, and corrosion.

Adjustable Kettlebells vs. Standard

For home gym owners, we often recommend adjustable kettlebells over standard ones for two main reasons: They’re generally more affordable and they take up less space. That doesn’t mean they’re perfect for everyone, though.

RELATED: Adjustable Kettlebell Vs. Standard

Some adjustable kettlebells have a plastic or rubber handle, which can be much harder to grip than the textured handles often found on standard ‘bells. We don’t have to tell you why this can be an issue, but it can also create problems if your adjustable kettlebell’s shell is made of plastic (which many are). Plastic is much easier to break than steel or iron.

Kettlebells vs. Dumbbells

In a perfect world, your home gym would contain the best kettlebells and dumbbells, but we don’t live in a perfect world. If you’re stuck on which one to choose for your home workouts, here are a few things to keep in mind:

Coop compares a kettlbell to a dumbbell
Coop comparing the performance metrics between kettlebells and dumbbells
  • Kettlebells have much different weight increments than dumbbells, often listed in kilograms over pounds
  • Kettlebells will work more of your stabilizer muscles due to their center of gravity being further away from your hand
  • Kettlebells can be better for full-body exercises and combining strength and cardio training
  • Kettlebells can be great for grip strength
  • Dumbbells are easier for beginners because they require less technique than kettlebells

Get the full details in our dumbbells vs. kettlebells guide.

How to Hold a Kettlebell

According to certified personal trainer and USA Weightlifting Level-1 Coach Kate Meier, the best kettlebell hand placement depends on what type of movement you’re doing, though there are some universal truths.

“First, always wrap your thumb around the handle (don’t just use your four fingers as your grip),” says Kate. “Secondly, don’t death-grip the kettlebell. You should have a firm grip so it doesn’t fly out of your hands, but you don’t need to squeeze it so hard that your forearms burn (you’ll get a good enough pump with a just-firm-enough grip).”

For Double-Handed Movements

Holding a kettlebell for a double-handed movement like a kettlebell swing will depend on your hand size, Kate says.

“Your hands should be placed just slightly apart, biasing each hand toward the corners of the handle in an overhand grip,” she says. “Depending on how big your hands are and your comfort, you may find your pinkies gripping down the side of the handle, and that’s OK.”

For Single-Handed Movements

When it comes to teaching her clients kettlebell hand placement for single-handed movements, Kate takes it on a case-by-case basis since there are two general categories of single-handed moves—simple and complex.

A simple move would be a row or deadlift, in which she recommends a centered, overhand grip.

The same rule, however, wouldn’t apply to a snatch. Here’s her guidance for that:

“You may find more control and smoother movement by gripping the handle more toward the corner instead of dead center (though this usually comes down to preference),” she says. The reason for the switch is that kettlebell snatches are notorious for bruising wrists and forearms.

For a Turkish get-up, you’ll want to return to a more centered grip while switching up how you grab the handle. “Put your hand up through the underside of the handle instead of an overhand grip,” Kate explains. “Front rack, overhead holds, and carries would also use this through-the-handle grip.”

Best Kettlebells at a Glance

To break this guide down to the short and sweet details, we’ve compiled a table featuring all the most important information you need when deciding between the best kettlebells on the market.

ModelBest ForWeight RangePrice RangeNotable Features
REP Fitness Kettlebell SetThose looking for a kettlebell set that sports a textured black powdercoat for enhanced grip8-24 kg (17.6-52.9 lbs)Single Set: $360.99
Double Set: $704.99
Sets can be bought in pairs to accommodate dual-weight movements
Rogue E-Coat KettlebellsAnyone who wants an extra-durable kettlebell set with a wide weight range9-88 lbs$44 to $163Cast-iron core and e-coat finish result in impressive durability 
Titan Competition Style KettlebellsSeasoned kettlebell users who don’t need a high weight ceiling8-32 kg (17.6-70.6 lbs)$84.99 to $184.99Each weight features a 35-millimeter handle for consistency
REP Fitness Adjustable KettlebellsKettlebell beginners who want to save space8-16 kg; 16-24 kg; 20-40 lbs$149.99 to $219.99The push-and-twist dial helps users with quick weight changes
GIANT Lifting V3 KettlebellsHeavy lifters who need a kettlebell over 100 pounds4-48 kg (9-106 lbs)$35 to $277.78Powder-coated finish on handles provides a comfortable grip
Yes4All Vinyl Coated KettlebellsAnyone who wants a solid kettlebell at a reasonable price5-90 lbs$19.52 to $149.38There are 18 weight options available
Iron Bull KettlebellLifters looking for a kettlebell with superior grip4-40 kg (9-88 lbs)$35 to $278Heavier models have wider handles for better grip

FAQs About the Best Kettlebells

What is the best kettlebell workout?

The ‘best kettlebell workout’ can be subjective from one athlete to the next. In our experience, the best kettlebell exercises include kettlebell swings, Turkish get-ups, kettlebell snatches, kettlebell clean and jerks, goblet squats, presses and thrusters, farmers’ carries, and waiters’ carries.

Which is better: an adjustable kettlebell or traditional kettlebell?

While both types of kettlebells can help you achieve your fitness goals, an adjustable kettlebell may be better for saving space and money, while traditional kettlebells are better for durability and consistent performance.

How quickly do you see results from kettlebells?

Kettlebells can help you achieve your desired results, whatever that may be, pretty quickly because they combine elements of strength and cardio training to give you a more efficient workout. The exact timeline will depend on how committed you are to your training, along with other factors like your nutrition and recovery.

References

  1. Falatic JA, Plato PA, Holder C, Finch D, Han K, Cisar CJ. Effects of Kettlebell Training on Aerobic Capacity. J Strength Cond Res. 2015 Jul;29(7):1943-7. doi: 10.1519/JSC.0000000000000845. PMID: 26102260.
  2. Jaiswal PR, Ramteke SU, Shedge S. Enhancing Athletic Performance: A Comprehensive Review on Kettlebell Training. Cureus. 2024 Feb 3;16(2):e53497. doi: 10.7759/cureus.53497. PMID: 38440022; PMCID: PMC10910645.
  3. Meigh, N. J., Keogh, J. W. L., Schram, B., Hing, W., & Rathbone, E. N. (2022). Effects of supervised high-intensity hardstyle kettlebell training on grip strength and health-related physical fitness in insufficiently active older adults: the BELL pragmatic controlled trial. BMC geriatrics, 22(1), 354. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12877-022-02958-z .
]]>
Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells Review (2025): Classic Dumbbells With a Comfortable Grip https://www.garagegymreviews.com/iron-bull-rubber-hex-dumbbells-review Fri, 19 Dec 2025 20:41:35 +0000 https://www.garagegymreviews.com/?p=246593 We’ve come a long way with the best dumbbells: From the cast iron fixed dumbbells of yesteryear’s iron paradises to space-saving, home-gym-friendly adjustable dumbbells, there’s something available for just about any training space and budget.

While the team here at Garage Gym Reviews typically recommends adjustable dumbbells for a home gym, there’s something about the classic look and feel of a traditional dumbbell with a hexagon head that some folks just need in the garage gym. 

Enter, the rubber hex dumbbells from Iron Bull Strength. With a knurled, straight handle and rubber-coated heads, these dumbbells look and feel great—all while helping protect your gym floor from errant drops and scuffs. In our Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells review, we’ll take a deeper dive in these dumbbells to see which home gym owners we’d recommend them to (and who may want to look elsewhere).

No Bull About It; We’re Trusted Experts

Since 2014, Garage Gym Reviews has been the source for expert reviews on everything related to home gyms, including cardio and strength training equipment, supplements, recovery tools, and more. We’ve built a reputation on providing honest feedback and information, enlisting certified personal trainers, strength and conditioning coaches, and elite-level athletes to provide their expert opinion while testing out top brands and products in the fitness industry.

For this Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells review, we had GGR Everything lead reviewer Lindsay Scheele, CPT, CNC and ultramarathoner and triathlete Steve Svoboda test these popular free weights. They used our dumbbell testing methodology to rate the dumbbells between 1 and 5 in key categories, including:

  • Construction: We look at the materials each dumbbell is made from, as well as how resilient they are to regular wear and tear. A 3-out-of-5 score means the dumbbells are high-quality, but some components like welds, coatings, or plastic hardware may degrade over time.
  • Ergonomics: How are the dumbbell head and handle shaped? In use, the dumbbells should be comfortable; not awkward or clunky. A dumbbell with an awkward shape that otherwise functions as intended earns a 3 out of 5.
  • Knurling and Grip: When you’re doing lots of repetitions, you want a good grip on your dumbbells. Here, we’ll look at the handle design and how it holds up. For a 3 out of 5, the dumbbell has knurling (a textured scoring of a bar to enhance your grip), but it’s fairly passive.
  • Overall Value: The price per pound of fixed dumbbells averages out near $3, depending on the materials and features. A 3 out of 5 means pricing is fair, but top scores go to dumbbells that are priced low, or offer added perks like free shipping or discounted sets.
Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.2
Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells
Sold in pairs or sets
Rubber coating
Straight handle
30-day money-back guarantee
Free shipping over $150
Financing available
Up to 10% off + free shipping on large purchases See Details
Materials
Steel construction with rubber coating
Weight Range
5-100 lbs
Weight Increments
5 lbs
Dumbbell Shape
Hex
Budget Shoppers
At about $2.20 per pound, these rubber hex dumbbells are pretty affordable
Serious Lifters
With a max weight of 100 lbs, most lifters will find the weight they need no matter how heavy
Pros
Broad weight range
Affordable price per pound
Scent-free rubber
Fully knurled handle
Cons
Very few customer reviews
Straight handle isn't for everyone
Handle Width
Varies by weight
Weight Range
5-100 lbs
Weight Increments
5 lbs
Warranty
Not disclosed

Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells have a classic hexagonal shape to prevent rolling around in your home gym. With a broad range from 5 pounds to 100 pounds, these dumbbells have a straight, fully knurled handle and rubber coating to help protect your home gym flooring—and the dumbbells—from any accidental drops.

What our tester says:

“We’re big fans of the affordable, budget-friendly home gym equipment that Iron Bull has made.”

A Quick Look at the Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells

With the slogan, “Unleash the Beast,” Iron Bull Strength has a primary goal of helping athletes and fitness enthusiasts fulfill their potential in strength training. To help achieve this, the brand offers a wide range of quality (but budget-conscious) home gym equipment, from knee sleeves and weightlifting belts to power racks and weight benches.

Iron Bull offers several different types of fixed dumbbell sets and dumbbell racks: Round ceramic dumbbells, urethane dumbbells, and rubber dumbbells with either round or hex-shaped heads. (We’re focusing on their rubber hex dumbbells in this review.)

Whichever dumbbells you choose, they can be an effective way to strength train, as a 2023 systematic review1 found that free weight training was just as effective as machine-based training. In a similar vein, a 2009 study2 found free-weight squats engaged more stabilizing muscles than a Smith machine.

A pair of Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells on the GGR testing center floor
A pair of Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells on the GGR testing center floor

The Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells have a classic hex design, which can keep your dumbbells from rolling around on your home gym floor. Instead of a curved, ergonomic grip, these dumbbells feature a straight knurled handle akin to an Olympic barbell. These dumbbells range from 5 to 100 pounds, and are available in both pairs and discounted sets.

Before You Buy

  • If you opt for a complete dumbbell set, make sure to have a dumbbell rack that can hold the whole range of weights. To take some guesswork out of the right type and size of home gym storage you need, Iron Bull does have some dumbbell set bundles that come equipped with a convenient dumbbell rack.
  • Shipping is free only for bulk orders of $5,000 or more. Additionally, orders over $2,500 take 5% off your entire order, and orders above $10,000 take 10% off your order.
  • Iron Bull lists that the Rubber Hex Dumbbells are covered by a “reliable” warranty, but it doesn’t list the warranty period. On the brand’s warranty page, they list that structural welds have a limited lifetime warranty, but it is unclear as to whether this solely covers rigs and racks or stretches to include free weights, as well. Ultimately, I’d like to see a more definitive answer on their site.

Are the Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells Worth It?

The Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells cost around $2 per pound, with prices as low as $1.71 per pound if you purchase the entire set from 5 to 100 pounds. This is in line with other similar dumbbells from brands like GIANT Lifting and Bells of Steel. In some cases, this cost is even cheaper, as is the case when compared to the REP Fitness Rubber-Coated Dumbbell 2.0s.

That said, the biggest drawback on these Iron Bull rubber dumbbells is that shipping isn’t included in the price. Shipping can be an expensive additional cost, especially for free weights like dumbbells or weight plates

You can get free shipping from Iron Bull on bulk orders over $5,000, but the entire dumbbell set costs $3,600, so you’ll need to find a dumbbell rack or a power rack to add to your purchase to get that discount. At the very least, a $2,500 order will net you a 5% discount on your total.

Our tester getting ready for a set of dumbbell lunges with Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells
Our tester getting ready for a set of dumbbell lunges with Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells

Despite the lack of free shipping, we still think Iron Bull has solid value, particularly in the brand’s discounted dumbbell sets, so we rate them at 4.5 out of 5 for the category. “For the price, these are a nice option that would look great in your home gym,” adds triathlete Steve Svoboda.

Still, fixed dumbbells may not work for some users in compact spaces. For such needs, I’d recommend adjustable dumbbells like the PowerBlock Pro 100 EXP Dumbbells.

Great for:

  • Home gym owners who want heavier dumbbells up to 100 lbs
  • Lifters that prefer the look and feel of commercial gym dumbbells
  • People looking to purchase an entire set of dumbbells rather than a single pair of adjustable weights

Not recommended for:

  • People in smaller home gym spaces
  • Lifters who prefer a more aggressive knurling pattern
  • Those who’d rather have an ergonomic handle for improved in-hand comfort

Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells Specs

Price per poundAs low as $1.71
Sold in?Pairs and sets
Weight range5-100 lbs
Weight increments5 lbs
Dumbbell shapeHex
MaterialsChrome-plated knurled handle, natural rubber
Handle diameter28 mm (5-15 lbs), 34 mm (20-100 lbs)
WarrantyNot disclosed

Using the Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells

Both triathlete Steve Svoboda and GGR Everything lead reviewer Lindasy Scheele, CPT, CNC, agree that the Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells are a solid dumbbell for everyday use. There’s nothing flashy about them, but they hit all the marks you’d want from a good set of traditional dumbbells, whether you’re using them for bodybuilding programming or CrossFit-style workouts. 

“They’re like the majority of hex dumbbells on the market,” says Lindsay after her first time with the dumbbells. “However, I do like the etched logo on the rubber head of the dumbbell. It helps them stand out and makes them feel a little higher-end.”

Our tester performing a goblet squat with an Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbell
Our tester performing a goblet squat with an Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbell

Steve did dumbbell bench press, overhead press, and lunges with the Iron Bull dumbbells, adding, “I really enjoyed using these dumbbells. Hex dumbbells are my preferred type of dumbbells, and the Iron Bull dumbbells feel sturdy throughout.”

Let’s dive into the particulars of these rubber hex dumbbells.

Construction

Iron Bull Strength uses a natural rubber to coat the outside of each dumbbell head, with the weight displayed on one head and the Iron Bull logo on the other. The handle finish is chrome-plated, providing protection from rust and corrosion. 

Our tester holding an Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbell at their side
Our tester holding an Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbell at their side

The handle is then connected to the dumbbells through durable friction welding—a welding method that is solid-state, meaning a filler metal isn’t needed to join the two metals together. Instead, heat is applied through mechanical friction to forge the pieces together. Simply put, these dumbbells are made to last.

Steve was impressed with the build of the dumbbells and says, “I didn’t notice any weak points on these dumbbells during my home workouts. They’re strong and sturdy, and I think they’ll last for a long time, especially in a home gym.”

RELATED: Home Gym Essentials

Lindsay agrees, rating the construction at 4 out of 5. “We even performed some drop tests with these dumbbells, dropping them from various heights (up to 8 feet) and they held up fine. I didn’t see any cracks or marks from the dumbbells.” As impressive as that may be, if you want your dumbbells to last, I’d refrain from dropping them.

Optionality

These dumbbells are available in plenty of different weights, ranging from 5 to 100 pounds in 5-pound increments. Whether you’re a beginner or an advanced lifter, there’s a good chance you can find a dumbbell or dumbbell range suitable for your needs.

RELATED: Adjustable Dumbbells Vs Fixed Dumbbells

Also, the dumbbells are available in both dumbbell pairs or sets, meaning these are a great option whether you’re just looking for a pair of 50-pound dumbbells or an entire set of high-quality free weights. In particular, Iron Bull offers the following weight sets:

  • 5 to 50 lbs
  • 5 to 75 lbs
  • 5 to 100 lbs
  • 55 to 75 lbs
  • 80 to 100 lbs

It’s a nice touch to have this level of optionality, as you can start off with dumbbells up to 50 pounds and then add on the heavier dumbbells later on as you get stronger. These dumbbells get a 4.5 out of 5 for optionality, with a half point taken off only because shipping costs aren’t included outright.

Ergonomics and Knurling

Typically, traditional dumbbell handles come in two variations: A curved ergonomic handle or a straight, knurled handle. Iron Bull has gone with the straight handle for these rubber hex dumbbells, which both our testers liked, but ultimately, it’s a matter of preference. For example, Steve tells me that he prefers a more ergonomic grip with breaks in the knurl. “But the straight handle with this grip feels good,” he admits.

The straight handle and medium knurling featured on Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells
The straight handle and medium knurling featured on Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells

The hexagonal head of the Iron Bull dumbbells help prevent any rolling on your garage floor, which is great if you know your training area is uneven or has a slight slant. You can also use the flat side of a hex dumbbell to maintain balance for unique exercises like man makers or renegade rows. Paired with a solid handle, the Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells get a 5 out of 5 for ergonomics.

Nevertheless, while we liked the feel of the handle, Lindsay wasn’t as impressed with the knurling on the grip, scoring it at 3 out of 5. “The knurl is more passive than your typical dumbbell handle,” she says, “Although they still hold chalk well. They didn’t slip and I didn’t lose my grip during any workouts, but the passive knurl is certainly something to note.”

RELATED: What Is Barbell Knurling?

Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells vs GIANT Lifting Rubber Hex Dumbbells

GIANT Lifting Rubber Hex Dumbbells
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.4
Giant Lifting Rubber Hex Dumbbells
Sold in pairs
Rubber coating
30-day return policy
Free shipping
Lifetime warranty for home use
Up to 35% off sitewide | Use GGR for add’l 5% off See Details
Materials
Steel chrome construction with rubber coating
Weight Range
2.5-100 lbs
Weight Increments
5 lbs
Dumbbell Shape
Hex
Those Who Lift Heavy
With dumbbells available as heavy as 100 pounds, serious lifters can go very heavy with a pair of these rubber dumbbells
Budget Shoppers
At around $2.20 per pound, these are some of the more affordable fixed dumbbells on the market
Pros
Sold in pairs
Free shipping
Hexagonal shape prevents weights from rolling
Rubber-coated heads for protection
Cons
Not sold in sets
Handle Width
28 mm (5 and 10 lbs), 34 mm (15-100 lbs)
Weight Range
2.5-100 lbs
Weight Increments
2.5-5 lbs
Warranty
Lifetime warranty for home use

Giant Lifting Rubber Hex Dumbbells range from 2.5 to 100 pounds and are sold in pairs. Available in both an ergonomic handle and a straight knurled handle, these dumbbells will appeal to a variety of lifters.

What our tester says:

“These dumbbells feel great, and the straight handles feel very similar to barbell knurling. It’s a nice grip and feel.”

 

Hopefully, this comparison will show how similar hex dumbbells can be from one brand to another. Many dumbbells and materials come from the same factories, so aside from slight logo changes, many fixed dumbbells can look eerily similar to one another.

For example, the GIANT Lifting rubber Hex Dumbbells look near-identical to the Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells when comparing specs: Both go up to 100 pounds, both have rubber-coated heads and chrome-plated handles, and both have similar handle diameters between 28 and 34 millimeters, depending on your chosen weight.

The major difference between the two comes in price and handle types. First off, the GIANT Lifting dumbbells are available with either a straight knurled handle or an ergonomic handle (we’ve tested both and they’re equally solid options). Price-wise, the Iron Bull dumbbells are cheaper…until you factor in shipping costs. Then, the totals seem to balance out.

Both can be solid options for your home gym, but if you prefer knowing your cost upfront or prefer an ergonomic grip, the GIANT Lifting Rubber Hex Dumbbells might be the better option for you, especially if you use a GIANT Lifting discount code. Still, if you prefer a straight handle and would rather not have too aggressive of a knurl, the Iron Bull dumbbells may be worth the cost.

Iron Bull Rubber Hex DumbbellsGIANT Lifting Rubber Hex Dumbbells
Price per poundAs low as $1.71As low as $2.13
Sold in?Pairs and setsPairs and sets
Weight range5-100 lbs2.5-100 lbs
Weight increments5 lbs2.5 or 5 lbs
Dumbbell shapeHexHex
MaterialsChrome-plated knurled handle, natural rubberChrome-finished handle, rubber-coated dumbbell head
Handle diameter28 mm (5-15 lbs), 34 mm (20-100 lbs)28 mm (2.5-10 lbs) 34 mm (15-100 lbs)
WarrantyNot disclosedLifetime (home use), 1 year (commercial use)

Customer Experience

We rate the customer experience at 3.5 out of 5. Iron Bull Strength offers 30-day returns on unused, unworn items still in the original packaging and with original tags. You’ll also need a proof of purchase or receipt to verify your return. 

The exact warranty period is not defined on the product page, however. On Iron Bull’s warranty page, the brand doesn’t list a warranty for dumbbells, although they state structural welds (which these dumbbells have), are covered with a limited lifetime warranty. I’d like to see a more specific period for these rubber hex dumbbells, though. To answer any questions you may have before purchasing, there are multiple ways to contact Iron Bull: Phone, email, contact form, and live chat.

Two Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells resting on home gym flooring
Two Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells resting on home gym flooring

Ordering the Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells

Although you can grab some Iron Bull Strength gear and accessories on Amazon, the Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells are available only through the brand’s website at the time of writing. They’re available in a variety of sets (including sets with a dumbbell rack) or you can purchase pairs of individual weights.

For orders in the United States, Iron Bull primarily uses USPS or UPS, unless you purchase “Items of substantial weight or large orders.” In these cases, they’ll ship freight. If you’re buying more than a pair of dumbbells, you can expect the weights to be shipped freight.

Customer Reviews

As of this writing, there are only two reviews on Iron Bull’s website concerning the rubber hex dumbbells. Both are 5-star reviews, and both praise the dumbbells, albeit with limited insight. One even does it in French, calling the dumbbell set a, “Produit de qualité supérieur,” or a top-quality product, according to Google Translate.

Usually, we prefer to have more customer reviews to get a better sense of the home gym community’s experience with fitness equipment, so we’ll be sure to update this section as more testimonials come in.

Online customer reviews related to Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells
Online customer reviews related to Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells

Final Verdict of Our Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells Review

If you’re in the market for some classic rubber hex dumbbells, the Iron Bull Strength Rubber Hex Dumbbells are certainly worth a look. With high value, durable construction, and a good feel while in use, these dumbbells can be a solid pick for a fixed dumbbell set. “I liked just about everything about these dumbbells and would use them again,” adds GGR Everything lead reviewer Lindsay Scheele, CPT, CNC.

Here are a few things to keep in mind as you browse through your options for dumbbells:

  • If you’re looking for multiple weights and have limited space, a pair of adjustable dumbbells may be a better option than several dumbbell pairs and a large dumbbell rack.
  • The knurling on these leans toward a passive feel, so you may want to consider other options if you prefer a more aggressive texture and grip.
  • Although Iron Bull has a lower price per pound than similar competitors, shipping isn’t included (unless you spend $5,000 or more), which will likely make the price pretty comparable to brands that include free shipping.
Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells

Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells have a classic hexagonal shape to prevent rolling around in your home gym. With a broad range from 5 pounds to 100 pounds, these dumbbells have a straight, fully knurled handle and rubber coating to help protect your home gym flooring—and the dumbbells—from any accidental drops.

Product Brand: Iron Bull

Product Currency: USD

Product Price: 1,100.00

Product In-Stock: InStock

Editor's Rating:
4.2

Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells Rating

Construction – 4
Optionality – 4.5
Knurling and Grip – 3
Ergonomics – 5
Purchasing and Delivery – 4
Value – 4.5
Customer Experience – 3.5
Customer Reviews – 5
Check Price

Iron Bull Rubber Hex Dumbbells Review: FAQs

Are rubber or iron dumbbells better?

It’s hard to say that either rubber or iron dumbbells are better than the other option, as each suits different needs for a home gym. Rubber-coated dumbbells help protect your home gym flooring, as the rubber can absorb shock and reduce noise if they’re dropped (which we don’t recommend). Iron dumbbells don’t have any layer of protection, so they’re more apt to damage your floor or equipment if dropped.

Iron dumbbells, on the other hand, are often a cheaper alternative to rubber-coated dumbbells, meaning these can be a great pick for folks on a budget. Ultimately, which is the better option will depend on your preferences and goals.

Are rubber hex dumbbells durable?

Rubber hex dumbbells can be a solid, durable option for home gym owners for a few reasons. Most notably, the rubber coating on the exterior of the dumbbell heads helps protect both the dumbbell and your gym floor in the event of an accidental drop. The dumbbell handle is often chrome-plated, as well, which can help resist rust and corrosion over the years. Additionally, the hexagonal shape keeps the dumbbells from rolling around on your gym floor between sets.

What brand makes the best dumbbells?

There are plenty of great options for dumbbells (fixed and adjustable) from brands like Rogue, REP Fitness, and Titan. Which is ideal or best for you will vary depending on your budget, fitness level, and goals. If you’re looking for a fixed dumbbell, our top recommendation for most are the GIANT Lifting Rubber Hex Dumbbells, which have a broad range of weights and optionality. Plus, they have a solid construction.

If you’re instead in the market for a pair of adjustable dumbbells, we typically recommend the Snode Adjustable Dumbbells for most. They can go up to 80 pounds and have a two-year warranty that covers drops from 32 inches or lower.

References

  1. Haugen, M. E., Vårvik, F. T., Larsen, S., Haugen, A. S., van den Tillaar, R., & Bjørnsen, T. (2023). Effect of free-weight vs. machine-based strength training on maximal strength, hypertrophy and jump performance – a systematic review and meta-analysisBMC sports science, medicine & rehabilitation15(1), 103. https://doi.org/10.1186/s13102-023-00713-4
  2. Schwanbeck, S., Chilibeck, P. D., & Binsted, G. (2009). A comparison of free weight squat to Smith machine squat using electromyographyJournal of strength and conditioning research23(9), 2588–2591. https://doi.org/10.1519/JSC.0b013e3181b1b181
]]>
The Best Cable Machines for Home Gyms Put to the Test (2026) https://www.garagegymreviews.com/best-cable-machine-for-home-gym Sat, 13 Dec 2025 23:16:04 +0000 https://www.garagegymreviews.com/?p=111220 The best cable machine for a home gym is the one that fits your training needs, space, and budget. Our group of certified personal trainers, weightlifting coaches, and home gym equipment experts has tested more than 30 cable machines, from the type you’d find in a commercial gym to portable options and more.

We also consulted with Mike Masi, DPT, about some of the strength-training benefits of cable training and how a cable machine can boost your at-home workouts. After that, we had the content medically reviewed by Dr. Bilal Ahsan, a resident physician in Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation (PM&R) who specializes in musculoskeletal, neurological, and sports-related conditions. Dr. Ahsan helped ensure accuracy throughout the article.

We use a meticulous, multi-point fitness equipment testing methodology to assess and rate factors such as:

  • Smoothness: Pulleys that operate efficiently without catching were given scores of 4 or more.
  • Weight range: Is there a good range for both beginners and veterans? Scores of 3 or more out of 5 were given to machines with 200 pounds of resistance or more.
  • Durability: Looking at materials used, we determined how well these machines would last, giving top scores to heavy-duty steel and aluminum pulleys.
  • Value: Is the machine priced appropriately for home gym owners? Top scores went to cable machines with lots of features that were competitively priced.

Combining those scores for an average rating helps us determine the best cable machines for this list. We helped nearly 750 people find their cable machine last year alone, so we’re certain we can help you, too.

GGR Gold Pick — Best Cable Machine

We crowned the 4.5-star-rated REP Ares 2.0 as the best cable machine for home gyms. Constructed with premium materials and featuring an innovative design, this cable machine provides tons of versatility with quality cable travel while hardly adding to your power rack’s overall footprint.

8 Best Cable Machines for Home Gyms

Current Top Deals

Now is a great time to upgrade your home gym, with major sales from top fitness brands. Browse the deals below to find a cable machine that suits your goals and budget.

Latest Updates

In January 2026, we re-evaluated all of the cable machines on our best-of list to ensure we’re still showcasing the best of the best, and reworked this page to provide the latest information.

Compare Side-By-Side

REP Fitness Ares 2.0 GIANT Power Rack with Lat Bar Bells of Steel Cable Crossover Titan Fitness Tonal 2 Smart Home Gym Beyond Power Voltra I Gronk Functional Trainer MaxPRO Portable Cable Machine
Rating
4.5
4.3
3.9
4.1
4.3
4.3
4.4
4.2
Type Functional trainer & lat pulldown/low row Power rack Power rack attachment Functional trainer Smart gym Portable cable trainer Functional trainer Portable cable machine
Footprint 80”-93” H x 57.6” W x 16″-41″ D 54″ L x 47″ W x 85″ H 26″ L x 40″ W x 84.5″ H 44” L x 64” W x 82” H 21.5″ L x 5.25″ W x 50.9” H 12.71″ L x 5.49″ W x 3.94″ H 41″ L x 61″ W x 83″ H 16″ L x 10″ W x 4″ H
Resistance (max ) Weight stack (max 450 lbs) Weight stacks (450 lbs max) Weight stack (max 200 lbs) (max Up to 250 lbs) Magnetic resistance (max 200 lbs) Weight stack (max 200 lbs) Digital resistance (max 300 lbs)
Subscription?
Accessories Lat pulldown bar, knurled D-handles Lat pulldown/low row attachment N/A Short bar, long bar, ankle strap, dual stirrup handles, tricep rope handles, single and double D-handles Handles, bar, rope, bench, foam roller, mat N/A Multi-grip pull-up bar, storage hooks, D handles, straight bar, triceps bar Quick connect long bar, workout handles, ankle/wrist straps, door brackets, door mount kit
Warranty Lifetime Limited lifetime Limited lifetime 1 year 2-year limited warranty 1 year Lifetime frame/parts 2 year

Best Overall Cable Machine: REP Fitness Ares 2.0 Cable Attachment

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Perfectly Crafted Construction
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.5
REP Fitness Ares 2.0
Attaches to power rack
2:1 cable ratio
Smooth feel
Financing available
Free shipping
Lifetime warranty
Free shipping on all orders See Details
Type
Functional trainer & lat pulldown/low row
Weight Stacks
260 lbs per side (upgradable to 310 lbs)
Compatible with
REP PR-4000 or PR-5000 racks
Pulleys
Aluminum
Space Savers
This functional trainer attaches to a REP PR-4000 or PR-5000 rack, so you don’t need to have two separate machines.
Unilateral Trainers
The dual weight stacks allow you to train each side of the body individually.
No-Budget Lifters
Adding certain upgrades can drive up the cost, especially if you don’t already own a compatible rack.
Pros
Swiveling pulleys
Built-in micro-adjustment plates
Adds versatility to a power rack
Comparable in price to the OG Ares
Cons
Only compatible with certain REP power racks
Product dimensions
57.6″ W; 80″ or 93″ H; adds 6″ of depth to your rack
Plate Tolerance
3%
Pulley Ratio
2:1
Weight capacity
450 lbs (trolleys and cables)

The REP Ares 2.0 is an upgrade of the original REP Fitness Ares Cable Attachment. This functional trainer integration features improvements such as a raised low row attachment point, as well as a deeper set weight stack, to allow for more space within the power rack. The Ares 2.0 comes with dual 260-pound weight stacks, with an option to make them 310 pounds.

What our tester says:

“Although the original Ares was nice, the REP Ares 2.0 keeps the level of quality high, using premium cables and pulleys. The cable travel is very smooth, and the rack stays solid.”

At a Glance 

  • Functional trainer cable rack attachment
  • Above average maximum resistance
  • Pricier cable machine compared to the average
  • Lifetime warranty higher than the standard

Editor’s note: This cable crossover attachment only works with REP Fitness PR-4000 and PR-5000 series racks, which are high-quality racks that we’ve recommended in other roundups. If you don’t have a REP Fitness rack, this crossover attachment will probably not work.

Most home gym owners have some sort of squat rack, as these can be a versatile piece of equipment with the addition of power rack attachments. If you have a power rack, particularly from REP Fitness, and you want a cable machine that won’t take up too much of your gym space, the REP Ares 2.0 Cable Attachment is a perfect choice for your home. With a 5-out-of-5 score for its durability and construction, this is a premium product with a quality build.

Smoothness: 5/5

Man using the REP Ares 2.0 dual pulleys for unilateral work
With premium cables and aluminum pulleys, the cable travel on the REP Ares 2.0 is extremely smooth.

Accessories: 4/5

Man performing lat pulldowns on the REP Ares 2.0
The D-handles and lat bar come with knurling to improve grip on heavy sets—a nice touch that impressed our testers.

Construction & Durability: 5/5

Man adjusting the trolley on the REP Ares 2.0
These lightweight but premium trolleys have upgraded UHMW plastic to prevent scratching on your power rack.

Why We Like The REP Ares 2.0

An upgrade from the original REP Ares Cable Attachment, the REP Ares 2.0 attaches around your PR-4000 or PR-5000 rack, only adding a few inches in height, width, and depth to your power rack. That keeps this cable attachment fairly compact for your gym space, earning the Ares 2.0 a 4 out of 5 for its footprint. 

You can feel the quality with how sturdy the REP Ares attachment is. Our tester, GGR founder Coop Mitchell, told me, “The durability gets top marks from me. This feels solid, and the cables were smooth and quiet. I didn’t notice any catching during my pull or release.” The smoothness gets a 5 out of 5, as the aluminum pulleys make for an incredibly smooth feel during your workouts.

Boasting six terminals for cable attachments and dual 260-pound weight stacks, the REP Ares 2.0 grants tons of versatility. The narrower rack profile means you don’t get quite as good of a stretch from a chest fly when compared to a functional trainer, but outside of that, the cable attachment shines, with the lat pulldown really being its shining achievement. You can use a banana hook to attach the knurled lat pulldown bar to both weight stacks, allowing for heavy weights on pulldowns and low rows.

The original REP Ares had wide low pulleys, and the connector was a long, straight bar, which was a little awkward. The Ares 2.0 feels much better, although the pulleys could still be a bit higher.

Coop Mitchell, GGR founder and product expert

Alternatives

While it’s a well-engineered piece of gym equipment, building out the Ares around your rack can be pricey. The cable attachment starts at around $3,000, and can increase due to the size and build of your power rack. If you don’t have a REP power rack already, you’ll have to buy one with it, as well, which will get expensive, fast.

The dual weight stacks also take up a bit of the inside of the rack space, so you may be a little cramped using the inside of a four-post power rack for squats. With a six-post rack, you’ll still have plenty of room inside the cage. “If you squat on the outside of your rack, it’ll be a non-issue, too,” Coop let me know.

If you prefer American-made products, be sure to check out the Rogue FM-6 Functional Trainer, the company’s take on a rack-integrated cable system. Although the pulleys are imported, the rest of the machine is made in the United States.

Testing Breakdown

It’s a bit expensive, but the Ares 2.0 rated well in many factors we tested. Here’s how it scored.

Overall Rating: 4.5/5

Delivery and Assembly – 4
Construction and Durability – 5
Footprint and Portability – 4
Smoothness – 5
Weight Limit – 5
Accessories – 4
Value – 4
Customer Experience – 4.5
Customer Reviews – 4.9

Vs. The Average

Although it’s a bit pricier than the average cable machine, the REP Ares 2.0 has a minimal footprint, adding only a few inches to the footprint of your current REP power rack.

REP Ares 2.0Average Cable Machine
PriceStarts at $2,999.99$2,265
Type of machinePower rack attachmentVaries by profile
FootprintAdds 6” D x 5.2” W x 0.9” or 2.1” H to power rack dimensions25.6” L x 31.8” W x 49.4” H
Resistance typeWeight stackWeight stack
Max resistanceDual 260-lb stacks (can be upgraded to 310 lbs)250 lbs
Pulley materialAluminumNylon
Cable ratio2:12:1
WarrantyLifetimeMulti-year (2 or more)

You can check out our thoughts on this updated cable machine in our REP Ares 2.0 review.

Best Cable Machine for Small Home Gyms: GIANT Lifting Garage Gym Power Rack With Lat/Low Row

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

High Value at a Budget Cost
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.3
GIANT Lifting Garage Gym Power Rack with Lat/Low Row
Outdoor
Heavy-duty
Affordable
Free shipping
Financing available, HSA/FSA eligible
Lifetime frame warranty
Up to 35% off sitewide | Use GGR for add’l 5% off See Details
Type
Power rack
Material
2″ x 2″ 14-gauge steel
Hole Size
1″
Weight Capacity
700 lbs
Value Shoppers
At around $700, we scored this rack a perfect 5 out of 5 for value
Strength Enthusiasts
The 1:1 ratio means you can really load up when using the 450-pound plate-loaded cable attachment
Pros of the Giant Lifting Garage Gym Power Rack 2.0
Durable steel tubing
Lat pulldown/low row attachment with a 1:1 ratio
Extended pipe safeties and padded J-cups
Laser-cut numbers
Cons of the Giant Lifting Garage Gym Power Rack 2.0
Long shipping times
700-pound weight capacity might not be enough for some users
May wobble with heavy squats
Product Dimensions
85″ H x 54″ D x 47″ W
Material
2” x 2” 14-gauge steel
Weight Capacity
700 lbs
Warranty
Lifetime warranty on frame

The Giant Lifting Garage Gym Power Rack with Lat/Low Row is a durable, high-value rack that comes with a lat pulldown/low row attachment with a 1:1 ratio. It’s one of the best-value rigs for home gym owners.

What our tester says:

“It may not be worthwhile for competitive strength athletes because it’s constructed from 14-gauge steel and has a weight rating under 1,000 pounds, but for many folks, this is a solid option that won’t break the bank.”

At a Glance 

  • Power rack and plate-loaded pulldown/low row combo
  • Below-average pricing
  • Compact footprint for a squat rack
  • Below average steel

The Giant Lifting Garage Gym Power Rack 2.0 with Lat/Low Row gets our pick for those in small spaces because it combines two machines in one: a plate-loaded lat pulldown/low row attachment and a squat rack. This isn’t the only squat rack and cable machine combo, but based on our many years of testing, it’s one of the most compact options available at 54 inches deep and 47 inches wide (shy of 18 square feet), earning a 4 out of 5 for its footprint.

Footprint: 4/5

Man using the lat pulldown machine attachment on the Giant Garage Gym Rack 2.0
The Garage Gym Power Rack 2.0 combines a squat rack with a cable machine all white remaining fairly compact.

Value: 5/5

Giant Lifting Garage Gym Power Rack 2.0 with a barbell on the J-hooks
At under $750, this power rack and cable machine combination is budget-friendly and presents high value.

Construction & Durability: 3/5

A man performing seated low rows with the Giant Lifting Garage Gym Rack 2.0 with lat and low row attachments
Even though the weight capacity will suit most people, the thinner steel tubing and nylon pulleys led us to dock a couple points here.

Why We Like the GIANT Lifting Garage Gym Power Rack With Lat/Low Row

I tested out the Giant Lifting power rack and the lat and low row attachment, and I think it’s a pretty solid budget option. This may not be the option for powerlifters or strength athletes (like me) needing a higher weight capacity or stronger steel, but this still has great value for a budget-priced starter rack. I rate the value at 5 out of 5.

Since the cable machine attachment is plate-loaded, you can load it with up to 450 pounds of weight plates. Plus, it has a 1:1 ratio, so 100 pounds really feels like 100 pounds. There’s also a multi-grip pull-up bar, padded J-cups, and 2-inch spaced holes on the uprights for your power rack attachments. It comes with many of the essential attachments, so I give the accessories a 4-out-of-5 score.

There are weight horns on the base of the rack to help weigh down the rack. Without it, it can be a little shaky, but even a slight amount of weight made a huge difference.

Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Alternatives

The 85-inch height won’t be ideal for everyone, especially taller athletes like me. I’m over 6 feet tall, so I’d have to bend my legs a lot to get a full range of motion on pull-ups. I also had to sit on the floor for my lat pulldowns. It’s still very possible for larger athletes to use this machine, but you might have to skip using a weight bench on some cable movements.

The one area where Giant gets a low score is durability: a 3 out of 5. The 14-gauge steel is pretty thin, and the nylon pulleys—though smooth—aren’t as tough as aluminum. The rack’s 700-pound weight capacity and the cable’s 450-pound capacity should cover most home gym owners, though.

If you need a heavy-duty squat rack, we suggest the REP Fitness PR-4000 Power Rack. The 11-gauge steel makes it able to handle some heavy barbells, and you can also add a lat pulldown and low row machine—or even the Ares 2.0—to the back of the rack.

Testing Breakdown

The Giant Garage Gym Power Rack 2.0 has great value at a budget price, although it uses some budget materials. Here’s how we scored it.

Overall Rating: 4.2/5

Delivery and Assembly – 4
Construction and Durability – 3
Footprint and Portability – 4
Smoothness – 4
Weight Limit – 4.5
Accessories – 4
Value – 5
Customer Experience – 5
Customer Reviews – 4.7

Vs. The Average

The Giant Lifting Power Rack is one of the cheaper options on our list. When compared to the average cable machine, those savings are present, as well.

GIANT Lifting Garage Gym Power Rack With Lat/Low RowAverage Cable Machine
Price$749.98$2,265
Type of machinePower rack with low row and lat pulldownVaries by profile
Footprint54” D x 47” W x 85” H25.6” L x 31.8” W x 49.4” H
Resistance typePlate-loadedWeight stack
Max resistance450 lbs250 lbs
Pulley materialNylonNylon
Cable ratio1:12:1
WarrantyLimited lifetimeMulti-year (2 or more)

Best Cable Machine Power Rack Attachment: Bells of Steel Cable Crossover Power Rack Attachment

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Solid Value, Budget-Friendly Pricing
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
3.9
Bells of Steel Cable Crossover Power Rack Attachment
Fits 84.5″ BoS racks
Uses 1” or 2” plates
Free shipping
Has both high and low pulleys
Financing available through Affirm
Limited lifetime warranty on the frame
Up to 62% off select products See Details
Versatility
The dual cables let you perform chest flys, curls, rows, and more
Solid Construction
The high-quality rails and uprights are built for durability under load
Glides Smoothly
The attachment’s aluminum pulleys and premium bearings provide consistent resistance
Rack Attachment
The rack-mounted design eliminates the need for a full standalone unit
Rack Owners
This attachment is compatible with the 84.5” Light Commercial and Residential power racks from Bells of Steel
Wants Versatility
With this rack, you can train with more exercise variety while using weight plates you may already own
Small Home Gyms
The attachment is great for home gym owners with limited floor space since you don’t need a separate machine
Value Shoppers
You can get this attachment for less than a standalone cable machine, and it’s build quality is solid
Pros
Doesn’t require a separate machine
Allows you to train cable-based movements
Smooth-moving pulleys
Fits both 1- and 2-inch weight plates
Cons
Only compatible with certain racks
Assembly can take time
Separate weight plates not included
Weight Capacity
160 lbs per side
Pulleys
Fixed high and low pulleys
Compatibility
Fits 85.4” Light Commercial and Residential BoS Racks

This attachment brings cable functionality to your home rack setup without eating up valuable floor space. It’s only compatible with the 84.5” Light Commercial and Residential power racks from Bells of Steel, but if you already own one of those racks, this attachment can unlock even more exercises. Plus, you can use weight plates you already have at home.

At a Glance

  • Budget-priced cable crossover rack attachment
  • Above average footprint when connected to a squat rack
  • Below average weight capacity
  • Limited lifetime warranty on frame is above standard

Editor’s note: This cable crossover attachment only works with Bells of Steel racks, which are high-quality racks that we’ve recommended in other roundups. If you don’t have a BoS rack, this crossover attachment will probably not work.

Although it’s only compatible with Bells of Steel racks, the Cable Crossover Power Rack Attachment is a solid pick for a cable rack attachment because of its low price and decent versatility, earning the rack a 4.5 out of 5 for value. Simply attach the cable machines on the front sides of your rack and get to pulling.

Smoothness: 4/5

A look at the Bells of Steel Cable Crossover weight horns
While the pulleys feel pretty smooth in use, customers warn that you’ll need to distribute weight evenly to prevent any catching.

Value: 4.5/5

A side view of the Bells of Steel Cable Crossover attachment
This cable crossover rack attachment is priced well under the average cable machine, making it a high value product for budget shoppers.

Footprint: 3/5

A front view of the Bells of Steel Cable Crossover
This cable crossover will add 2 feet of width and 40 inches of depth to your rack, leaving a sizable footprint in your garage gym.

Why We Like the Bells of Steel Cable Crossover Power Rack Attachment

While we have yet to test out this cable machine ourselves, we’re big fans of this being a plate-loaded cable machine, meaning the resistance comes from weight plates you most likely have lying around your home gym (especially if you’re attaching this to a power rack). The 160-pound weight capacity may not be enough for strength athletes like myself, but it should handle most workouts for your average home gym owner. 

I should let you know the pulleys only work on the top and bottom positions, so it won’t have the same versatility as a functional trainer with adjustable pulleys. That’ll be fine for some folks, though, as there are countless exercises you can do from these positions that can’t be done with a squat rack alone. Customer reviewers have noted, however, that the weight needs to be evenly distributed across the weight horns or the pulleys may catch, earning them a 4 out of 5 for smoothness.

Another plus is that this item ships free, which is nice for this heavier 110-pound piece of equipment.

A cable crossover machine can take up a bit of room, but it’ll allow for a good stretch across the pecs during flyes and other exercises.

Caine Wilkes, Olympian and GGR senior staff writer

Alternatives

The biggest drawback to this cable crossover is that it’s only compatible with Bells of Steel racks—particularly the 2.3-inch-by-2.3-inch power racks. It won’t work for racks outside of that, including the Bells of Steel Hydra Rack.

Another issue is its footprint. One attachment is 24 inches wide and 40 inches long, but there will be two of these attached to an already large squat rack. You’ll probably need about 10 feet across to effectively use this cable crossover. Because of this, the attachment gets a 3 out of 5 for its footprint.

For another rack with cable crossover functionality, check out the Force USA MyRack. This modular rack can be customized for your exact needs with accessories such as a cable crossover and other rack attachments.

Testing Breakdown

Despite a below-average weight capacity for this plate-loaded cable crossover attachment, we still think this unit has good value. Here’s a breakdown of its ratings.

Overall Rating: 3.9/5

Delivery and Assembly – 5
Construction and Durability – 3.5
Footprint and Portability – 3
Smoothness – 4
Weight Limit – 2
Accessories – 4
Value – 4.5
Customer Experience – 5
Customer Reviews – 4.5

Vs. The Average

While the footprint looks comparable to your average cable machine, remember that you’ll have two of these attachments, doubling the space needed.

Bells of Steel Cable Crossover Rack AttachmentAverage Cable Machine
Price$587.99$2,265
Type of machinePower rack attachmentVaries by profile
Footprint26” L x 40” W x 84.5” H (each side)25.6” L x 31.8” W x 49.4” H
Resistance typePlate-loadedWeight stack
Max resistance160 lbs (each side)275 lbs
Pulley materialNylonNylon
Cable ratioNot disclosed2:1
WarrantyLimited lifetime (frame), 90 days (cables and pulleys)Multi-year (2 or more)

Best Home Cable Crossover Machine: Titan Fitness Functional Trainer

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Strong Construction, Smooth Cables
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.1
Titan Fitness Functional Trainer
Functional Trainer
Includes Pull-Up Bar
2:1 Pulley Ratio
1-year warranty
Free shipping
30-day money back guarantee
Up to 65% off + free shipping on every order See Details
Equimpent Type
Functional Trainer
Weight Capacity
Dual 200-pound weight stacks
Warranty
1-year warranty
Home Gym Owners
This compact functional trainer will fit well in most home gyms
Value Shoppers
This isn’t cheap, but it’s versatile and includes a variety of accessories
Strength Athletes
A functional trainer allows users to perform a variety of isolation movements, making it a great choice for anyone training for strength and hypertrophy
Pros
Heavy 200-pound stacks (100-pound working weight) with a 2:1 ratio
Aluminum pulleys
Low starting weight of 20 pounds (10 lb working weight)
Competitive price point
Cons
Would’ve preferred a taller option (but the 82-inch height allows it to fit in home gyms with low ceilings)
Only comes with 1-year warranty
The unit can shake when using the top end of the stack, but not enough to be concerned
Dimensions
82” H x 64” W x 44” D
Accessories
Short bar, long bar, ankle strap, dual stirrup handles, rope handles, and single and double D-handles
Resistance
Dual 200-lb stacks (2:1 pulley ratio)

The Titan Fitness Functional Trainer is much like the functional trainer you’d find in a commercial gym, in that it uses commercial-grade materials, but comes in a home gym footprint.

What our tester says:

“While there’s more affordable options out there, I think paying the extra money is worth it for a more high-quality machine.”

At a Glance 

  • Functional trainer with dual 200-lb weight stacks
  • Above average price for cable machines
  • Smooth cable travel and good construction
  • Warranty is below average

The Titan Fitness Functional Trainer is just like the cable machine at your local commercial gym, just without having to wait for other people to finish their working sets on it. The real star is its versatility and weight stacks, which got a 4 out of 5. There are more than 1,000 adjustable positions, dual 200-pound weight stacks with a 2:1 ratio (20 pounds feels like 10), swiveling pulleys, and six accessory hooks. The sky’s the limit for what you can do with this machine.

Accessories: 4/5

attaching tricep ropes handles to pulley system
The Titan Functional Trainer comes with lots of attachments, but they’re not all the best quality.

Construction & Durability: 4/5

Profile view of Coop using cables on a Titan Fitness Functional Trainer
This functional trainer is built with heavy-duty materials that you’d typically find in a commercial gym setting.

Delivery & Assembly: 3.5/5

titan fitness functional trainer in box
Customer reviews complain about the assembly instructions being hard to follow, but the pre-ran cables are a nice touch.

Why We Like the Titan Fitness Functional Trainer

We like the Titan Fitness Functional Trainer for its build and quality. The dual weight stacks provide a decent weight range that should be able to give beginners and home gym veterans alike a decent challenge on most movements. “I wouldn’t expect to see people, in most training instances, maxing out the stacks,” GGR founder Coop Mitchell said when I asked him about the weight limit. “I think the weight that’s here is good for most people.”

The aluminum guide rods needed to be lubricated, though once they were, the smoothness earned a 4 out of 5. The red anodized aluminum pulleys add to the smoothness—and they make for a sharp look on the functional trainer.

The Titan Functional Trainer comes with a short bar, long bar, ankle strap, dual stirrup handles, rope handles, and single and double D-handles so you can do countless strength-based movements. I asked Coop for his thoughts on the attachments and he replied, “The quality isn’t anything to write home about, but that’s a lot to be included with the machine.” He rated the accessories at 4 out of 5.

It’s very smooth and stable in use, and it should be at nearly 700 pounds.

Coop Mitchell, Garage Gym Reviews founder

Alternatives

Functional trainers can take up a lot of space in a home gym, and the Titan Fitness Functional Trainer is no different. It is one of the more compact traditional trainers (the 64-inch width is narrower than the industry standard 72 inches for double-stack cable machines), but you’ll still need a good amount of dedicated space for it. At 672 pounds, it’s not moving once you build it, either. We rate the footprint at 3.5 out of 5.

The shorter 82-inch height also means that taller people won’t be able to do pull-ups well on it, which is a shame because the trainer comes with a multi-grip pull-up bar that has a nice-feeling powder coat that provides excellent grip.

For a more compact solution, check out the Torque Anker 7, a wall-mounted functional trainer that sits just a few inches off the wall.

Testing Breakdown

The Titan Fitness Functional Trainer scored pretty well in most categories, although its footprint and assembly dropped its score slightly. Below is the full breakdown.

Overall Rating: 3.8/5

Delivery and Assembly – 3.5
Construction and Durability – 4
Footprint and Portability – 3.5
Smoothness – 4
Weight Limit – 4
Accessories – 4
Value – 4
Customer Experience – 3.5
Customer Reviews – 4.9

Vs. The Average

Although it’s a pricier cable machine, as a functional trainer, this machine is probably priced mid-range. Additionally, the footprint is compact for a functional trainer, but well above the average cable machine’s dimensions.

Titan Fitness Functional TrainerAverage Cable Machine
Price$2,999.99$2,265
Type of machineFunctional trainerVaries by profile
Footprint44” D x 64” W x 82” H25.6” L x 31.8” W x 49.4” H
Resistance typeWeight stackWeight stack
Max resistanceDual 200-lb stacks275 lbs
Pulley materialAluminumNylon
Cable ratio2:12:1
Warranty1 yearMulti-year (2 or more)

For more, check out our in-depth Titan Fitness Functional Trainer review.

Best Smart Cable Machine: Tonal 2 Smart Home Gym

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Solid Construction and Smart Features
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.3
Tonal 2 Smart Home Gym
Wall-Mounted
Small Footprint
Virtual Classes
2-year limited warranty
Free shipping
30-day return policy
Equipment Type
Wall-mounted functional trainer
Weight Setings
5-250 lbs
Warranty
2-year limited warranty
Home Gym Owners
This wall-mounted trainer doesn’t take up much space, and offers plenty of versatility
Value Shoppers
This is expensive, but if you have the space and budget, it’s a great machine
Intermediate Lifters
The max weight of 250 pounds will be plenty for beginner to intermediate lifters, though stronger users may need more resistance
Pros
AI features
Smart home gym
Versatile
Small footprint
Cons
Expensive
Requires an additional membership
Dimensions
21.50″ W x 50.9″ H x 5.25” D
Accessories
Handles, bar, rope, bench, foam roller, mat
Resistance
Up to 250 pounds

The Tonal 2 is a complete smart home gym that offers versatility in a compact piece of equipment, but at a high price.

At a Glance 

  • Wall-mounted smart home gym
  • Expensive compared to most cable machines
  • Above average construction
  • Below average warranty

The Tonal 2 isn’t what most people think of when they hear “cable machine,” but if you’re looking for a piece of smart equipment that can do it all, you can’t do much better than this. We have personally used Tonal for years and recently tested out the upgraded Tonal 2. We’ve enjoyed almost every aspect of it. It gets a perfect 5-out-of-5 score on its smart features, and it’s built well—especially when you compare it to the original model. 

RELATED: Tonal Coupons and Discounts

Construction: 4.5/5

Coop adjusting the Tonal 2.0 arm
With stronger cables and a powder-coated finish, the Tonal 2 is a more durable, upgraded version of the original model.

Footprint: 4.5/5

Tonal 2.0 set up on a wall
Although the wall-mounted unit won’t take up too much room, Tonal recommends a decent amount of floor space to effectively use the machine.

Smart Features: 5/5

Coop Mitchell using the Tonal 2.0 for curls
With a faster processor and real-time feedback, our testers thought the Tonal 2 was abundant in high-tech features.

Why We Like the Tonal 2

The versatility of the Tonal 2 is quite impressive, which we rate at 4 out of 5. “It’s basically made to be an all-in-one home gym,” Coop Mitchell, GGR founder, told me. “You pretty much wouldn’t need anything else.” The cable arms, attached to a wall-mounted touchscreen, can be adjusted to work out just about any muscle group, and the digital resistance offers a unique stimulus that causes some lifelong trainees to quiver halfway through their set—even with the modest 250 pounds of maximum resistance.

Don’t stress too much about the weight, though. One of Tonal’s best features is the auto-powered weight suggestions, which are done through a full-body assessment you take when setting up your machine. This is great because it takes a lot of the guesswork out of resistance training, and customizes the experience to each user. This feature can be disabled, though, if you want to enter your own data.

The customization doesn’t end there, as you can choose from different workout styles from strength training to kickboxing, and even yoga and meditation classes. An on-screen personal trainer will guide you through each workout and show you how moves are supposed to be performed.

The construction earns a 4.5 out of 5 from us, as well, as the cables—previously an issue—have been replaced with a more durable material. Tonal switched the pulleys to nylon, too, to help reduce the wear and tear on the cables. “Although aluminum pulleys are a smoother, more premium component, the nylon won’t wear the cables down as much,” Coop explained when I asked, “So it seems like a smart move to me.”

The faster processor helps make weight adjustments faster, which makes a big difference that I can feel while using the Tonal 2.

Coop Mitchell, GGR founder and expert product tester

Alternatives

At close to $4,300, on top of a $59 monthly class membership fee, the Tonal 2 isn’t a piece of budget home gym equipment. Professional installation is required, as well, which is an additional charge. We still think there’s good value here, scoring it at a 4 out of 5 for the category, but Tonal 2 won’t fit everyone’s budget.

Also, keep in mind you need a good amount of space—at least 7 feet deep and 7 feet wide around your machine—so depending on your home gym setup, this may require more space than you have available.

Don’t want your smart home gym on the wall? Try out the Vitruvian Trainer+, a smart cable machine that rests on your floor and also provides up to 440 pounds of resistance.

Testing Breakdown

While the Tonal 2 does have customer reviews, there’s no rating for them, so we didn’t include it in the score. Here’s how the smart gym equipment fared in our testing.

Overall Rating: 4.3/5

Delivery and Assembly – 4
Construction and Durability – 4.5
Footprint and Portability – 4.5
Versatility – 4
Smart Features – 5
Accessories – 4
Value – 4
Customer Experience – 4
Customer Reviews – 0

Vs. The Average

Using smart features like digital resistance as opposed to traditional weight stacks or plate-loaded machines, the Tonal 2 is expensive compared to your average cable machines. 

Tonal 2Average Cable Machine
Price$4,295$2,265
Type of machineSmart home gymVaries by profile
Footprint5.25” D x 21.5” W x 50.9” H25.6” L x 31.8” W x 49.4” H
Resistance typeDigitalWeight stack
Max resistance250 lbs (125 lbs each arm)275 lbs
Pulley materialNylonNylon
Cable ratioN/A2:1
Warranty2 years parts and labor, 1 year accessoriesMulti-year (2 or more)

To learn more about the original model, read our Tonal Smart Home Gym review

Most Versatile Cable Machine: Beyond Power Voltra I

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Highly Portable, Highly Versatile
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.3
Beyond Power Voltra I
Portable
Versatile
5 Training Modes
1-year warranty, extended warranties available
Free shipping
14-day return policy
Equimpent Type
Portable smart cable machine
Weight Setings
5-200 lbs (eccentric and concentric)
Warranty
12-month warranty with extended warranties available for an extra fee
Home Gym Owners
This compact and portable trainer can be used anywhere you can install your mount
Value Shoppers
It’s not cheap, but it’s portable and extremely versatile
Barbell Athletes
One of the Voltra’s mounting kits is designed for use with a power rack, so if you regularly train with a barbell, you probably have access to a compatible rack
Pros
Portable
Up to 200 pounds of resistance
Real-time data tracking
Can be brought through airport security
Cons
Expensive
Only has a one-year warranty
Dimensions
12.71” L x 5.49” W x 3.94” H
Accessories
Requires a mounting kit (not included)
Resistance
5-200 lbs (eccentric and concentric)

The Beyond Power Voltra I packs all the benefits of a cable machine into a portable design, though it comes with a high price tag.

What our tester says:

“In my dream minamalist setup, I would have a squat rack, bar and weight plates, a bench, adjustable dumbbells, and the Voltra I.”

At a Glance 

  • Lightweight, portable cable trainer
  • Close to the average price for cable machines
  • Smaller footprint than most cable machines
  • Below average warranty

The Beyond Power Voltra I’s standout feature is that it’s portable and can attach to just about any squat rack, but we love it because of its versatility, which earns 5 out of 5 stars. GGR founder Coop Mitchell has been using it for cable machine workouts every day for several months and told me, “I’ve done deadlifts, lateral raises, Nordic curls, lat pulldowns, and just about every other move included in my regular personal training sessions, all on this machine.”

Versatility: 5/5

A man works out with the Beyond Power Voltra I.
This compact cable machine can be placed anywhere on your rack and paired with another Voltra for countless exercises and workouts.

Footprint: 5/5

Coop does a tricep extension on the Beyond Power Voltra I.
Weighing under 13 pounds and being just over 12 inches long, the Voltra I can fit into just about any home gym space.

Value: 3/5

Coop dials in the resistance on a Beyond Power Voltra I.
Although it’s versatile, we can’t help but feel it’s slightly overpriced at over $2,000, especially considering that no mounting device is included.

Why We Like the Beyond Power Voltra I

“I’m considering simplifying my home gym setup and using the Voltra to replace a few machines,” Coop continued to tell me after I asked him about the versatility of the Beyond Power Voltra I. It creates up to 200 pounds of resistance, and the motor allows for smooth movement every time. As such, it gets a 4.5 out of 5 for its resistance.

Another thing that makes it versatile are the three modes that can be accessed on the screen—weight training, resistance band, and damper. Coop mostly stuck with weight training, which allows you to change the eccentric and concentric weight (think the down and up movements of a back squat) and adapts based on your range of motion. It also has a “chain” feature to simulate heavier weight during lockout, similar to using a chain on a barbell.

Although typically mounted onto a power rack, there are multiple mounting devices available, including a floor mount you can stand on for deadlifts, and adding to its portability.

Even better, Coop rates the durability of the cable machine at 5 out of 5, being very impressed with the quality of the build. I asked Coop which aspect stood out to him and he told me, “The cable that comes with it is very sturdy, too. It’s a synthetic cable that’s supposed to be stronger than steel.”

Lots of smart cable trainers aren’t quick to make weight adjustments, but that’s not the case with the Voltra I. It’s so quick to make adjustments on the fly.

Coop Mitchell, GGR founder and fitness equipment expert

Alternatives

You might be tempted to buy two of these machines for even further versatility, though I advise against that. Just one Voltra is pricey at over $2,000, even before ordering your mounting device. The value gets a middle-of-the-road 3 out of 5 from us. Two trainers would be costly, plus Coop told me that it’s hard to sync the machines together, making two-handed movements feel awkward and clunky.

Looking for a compact cable solution that’s (quite) a bit cheaper? Try out the Spud Inc. Pulley System, which is a simple pulley cable strapped onto a rack. Though it’s small, it can still hold up to 550 pounds of weights.

Testing Breakdown

Although highly versatile, we felt the Beyond Power Voltra I is a tad overpriced, and possesses a lackluster warranty. Here’s how it scored.

Overall Rating: 4.3/5

Delivery and Assembly – 4
Construction and Durability – 5
Footprint and Portability – 5
Versatility – 5
Resistance – 4.5
Accessories – 4
Value – 3
Customer Experience – 3.5
Customer Reviews – 5

Vs. The Average

With a price comparable to your average cable machine, this trainer shines with its compactness and lightweight design.

Beyond Power Voltra IAverage Cable Machine
Price$2,199$2,265
Type of machinePortable cable trainerVaries by profile
Footprint12.71” L x 5.49” W x 3.94” H25.6” L x 31.8” W x 49.4” H
Resistance typeDigitalWeight stack
Max resistance200 lbs (eccentric and concentric)275 lbs
Pulley materialN/ANylon
Cable ratioN/A2:1
Warranty1 year (can extend to 3 years at an additional cost)Multi-year (2 or more)

Learn more in our in-depth Beyond Power Voltra review.

Best Functional Trainer Cable Machine: Gronk Fitness Functional Trainer

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Top Marks in Cable Smoothness
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.4
Gronk Fitness Functional Trainer
Functional Trainer
Plenty of Accessories
2:1 Pulley Ratio
Lifetime frame and parts warranty
Free shipping
30-day money back guarantee
Save $549 See Details
Equimpent Type
Functional Trainer
Weight Resistance
200 lbs per side
Warranty
Lifetime frame warranty
Home Gym Owners
This compact functional trainer will fit well in most home gyms
Value Shoppers
This isn’t cheap, but it’s very smooth, durable, and feels just as good as some of the most high-end options we’ve tried
Strength Athletes
A functional trainer allows users to perform a variety of isolation movements, making it a great choice for anyone training for strength and hypertrophy
Pros
Made with durable parts
Smooth pulleys
Can be converted into a half rack
Dual 200-pound weight stacks
Cons
Expensive
Pull-up bar is plastic
Dimensions
41” D x 61” W x 83” H
Accessories
Multi-grip pull-up bar, optional half rack kit, optional low row plate, and optional lat pulldown seat
Resistance
200 lbs per side (2:1 pulley ratio)

The Gronk Fitness Functional Trainer surprised our product testers with smooth cable pulleys, a stable foundation, and quality attachments.

What our tester says:

“The components and ends of the cables are better than cheaper models that have the cable end with the glass balls. This has a feel similar to the Life Fitness Dual Adjustable Pulley, which is a higher-end pulley.”

At a Glance 

  • Functional trainer with dual 200-lb weight stacks
  • Above average price for cable machines
  • Very smooth cable travel
  • Above-average warranty

The Super Bowl champ (and Tom Brady BFF) Rob Gronkowski scored a touchdown with the Gronk Fitness Functional Trainer due to its excellent versatility, multiple attachments, and solid price point. 

“It reminds me of the high-end cable pulley systems from Life Fitness that you commonly see in commercial and hotel gyms,” GGR founder Coop Mitchell told me while testing the Gronk Functional Trainer. What really won us over, though, was the aluminum pulleys that scored a 5 out of 5 on the smoothness rating (plus the trainer’s swiveling handles).

Smoothness: 5/5

Coop works out with the Gronk Fitness Functional Trainer.
The aluminum pulleys make for some of the smoothest travel we’ve seen from a functional trainer, earning a perfect score.

Accessories: 4.5/5

Coop hooks up the straight bar attachment on the Gronk Fitness Functional Trainer.
The Gronk Fitness Functional Trainer has several unique attachments, including a half rack kit and an optional low row foot plate.

Footprint: 4/5

The Gronk Fitness Functional Trainer stands alone.
Although large, a nice feature is the 180-degree swiveling handles, allowing for hard angles so the trainer can be used in some unique spaces.

Why We Like the Gronk Fitness Functional Trainer 

I asked Coop about the durability of the Gronk Functional Trainer, and he replied, “Commercial-grade machines are designed to handle a lot of use from trainees, who, let’s face it, don’t care for the equipment. It says a lot that I can compare the Gronk Trainer to them.” He rates the construction and durability at 4 out of 5.

The 61-inch-by-41-inch footprint means it’ll take up quite a bit of space in your home gym, but it can be converted into a half-rack with J-cups and safety arms to act as a second (or primary) squat rack if needed. To be honest, I’d recommend a squat rack with functional trainer capabilities over a trainer with squat rack capabilities, as the former will be a sturdier solution, but this will still get the job done. 

There’s also a low-row foot plate, lat pulldown seat, and multi-grip pull-up bar, among other attachments, so it has plenty of versatility, earning a 4.5 out of 5 for the accessories.

This feels nearly identical to the high-end cable machines I’ve used in gyms over the years. It’s very impressive how smooth the cables feel.

Matt Dustin, CSCS, GGR Staff Writer

Alternatives

While we like the value of the Gronk Fitness Functional Trainer, its listed price of $3,299 is a steep cost. It’s commonly marked down for less, a common sales tactic with gym equipment, but even at a few hundred dollars cheaper, it’ll still be out of some folks’ budgets.

Another callout Coop had to tell me was that the multi-grip pull-up bar wasn’t the best he’s worked with due to the thin and smooth powder coat that fails to provide any real grip.

For a more compact functional trainer, check out the REP Arcadia Functional Trainer with its smaller footprint and shorter height.

Testing Breakdown

There’s not a lot to dislike about the Gronk Fitness Functional Trainer, and our scoring below reflected that.

Overall Rating: 4.4/5

Delivery and Assembly – 4
Construction and Durability – 4
Footprint and Portability – 4
Smoothness – 5
Weight Limit – 4
Accessories – 4.5
Value – 4.5
Customer Experience – 4.5
Customer Reviews – 5

Vs. The Average

With a higher cost and larger footprint than your average cable machine, we still think there’s value in this piece from Gronk Fitness, particularly due to the aluminum pulleys and smooth travel.

Gronk Fitness Functional TrainerAverage Cable Machine
Price$3,299$2,265
Type of machineFunctional TrainerVaries by profile
Footprint41” D x 61” W x 83” H25.6” L x 31.8” W x 49.4” H
Resistance typeWeight stackWeight stack
Max resistance200-lb dual stacks275 lbs
Pulley materialAluminumNylon
Cable ratio2:12:1
WarrantyLifetime frame and partsMulti-year (2 or more)

To learn more, check out our full Gronk Fitness Functional Trainer review.

Best Portable Cable Machine: MAXPRO Smart Connect Cable Machine

Updated by: Caine Wilkes, OLY, CNC, USAW-L1

Perfectly Rated for Portability
GGR Score
We test and review fitness products based on an independent, multi-point methodology.
4.2
MaxPRO SmartConnect Portable Cable Machine
Portable
Versatile
Bluetooth tracking
2-year limited warranty
0% financing available
30-day return policy
Save up to $509 on starter kits and bundles See Details
Equipment Type
Portable smart cable machine
Weight Setings
Up to 300 lbs
Accessories
Depends on the package you order
Warranty
2-year limited warranty
Those On The Move
This compact and portable trainer can be used anywhere and is easy to pack in your car
Space Savers
This portable home gym weighs only 10 lbs and has a small footprint even while in use, making it great for small spaces
Serious Lifters
With a maximum resistance of 300 lbs, even lifters who go heavy can get a good workout with this machine
Pros
Portable
Lightweight
Small footprint
Up to 300 lbs resistance
Cons
Pricey for a small piece of equipment
Sub-par accessories
Compatible app is not streamlined
Dimensions
16″ L x 10″ W x 4″ H
Accessories
Depends on the package you order
Resistance
Up to 300 lbs

The MaxPRO SmartConnect Portable Cable Machine is a lightweight and portable full body machine, which offers up to 300 pounds of resistance. This makes it an extremely versatile piece of portable equipment with a small footprint.

What our tester says:

“At first, the cables weren’t quite as smooth as I would have liked, but they simply needed a break-in period.”

At a Glance 

  • Smart cable trainer with compatible app
  • Above average resistance
  • Compact footprint and lightweight design
  • Average warranty of 2 years

The MAXPRO Smart Connect Cable Machine is great for people on the go, or even those in small apartments who want the benefits of a cable machine. GGR founder and fitness equipment guru Coop Mitchell has personally used this machine countless times and gave it a perfect 5 out of 5 for its portability. “It’s essentially a gym membership in a backpack,” he told me. “I’d definitely recommend it for frequent travelers.”

Portability: 5/5

Weighing less than 10 pounds and able to fit in a backpack, the MAXPRO Cable Machine is easy to carry for those frequently on the move.

Versatility: 4.5/5

A man does rows using the wall-mounted MAXPRO Smart Connect
Although the MAXPRO can be used from the floor, its ability to be mounted on a wall allows for a myriad of cable exercises to be done.

Value: 3.5/5

While it’s extremely portable and ideal for tight spaces, the lack of concentric resistance may not make the price worth it to some people.

Why We Like the MAXPRO Smart Connect Cable Machine

At 16 inches long and 7 inches in width while folded, and weighing only 9 pounds, it’s easy to bring the MAXPRO Smart Connect with you wherever you want to workout. And even though it’s small, this machine is capable of going up to 300 pounds in resistance with just a turn of a dial. Trust me, you’ll be feeling the burn on this one. That’s plenty of weight for most users, earning this machine a 4.5 out of 5 for versatility.

There’s quite a bit you can do with just the MAXPRO Smart Connect, but you’ll need a wall mount or certain accessories that aren’t included in the base purchase price for some lower body and upper body movements.

I asked Coop how the machine was built, and he told me it was solid, rating the construction and durability at 4 out of 5. He adds, “The cables do have a break-in period, but once you’ve used the machine for a while, you’ll see that they move so, so smoothly.”

I have a confession to make: I use the SmartConnect way more than I expected to. Although I still wish it did have both concentric and eccentric capabilities, I still enjoy using this cable machine.

Coop Mitchell, founder of Garage Gym Reviews

Alternatives

I’m a fan of smart home gym equipment like anyone else. And though it’s great you can sync the MAXPRO via Bluetooth to an app that tracks your workouts, Coop found himself not using it too much. “The app was pretty clunky to use, and sometimes it didn’t connect to my machine,” he explained to me. The app does come with a free workout library, but as stated before, some of the movements are dependent on purchasing accessories not included with the basic machine.

If you’d rather use free weights instead of cables with your smart home gym, take a look at Tempo Studio, a workout mirror that focuses on resistance training with dumbbells, barbells, and other free weights.

Testing Breakdown

The MAXPRO scored best in its footprint and portability, being great for people on a literal fitness journey. Here’s a breakdown of our testing scores.

Overall Rating: 4.2/5

Delivery and Assembly – 5
Construction and Durability – 4
Footprint and Portability – 5
Versatility – 4.5
Resistance – 4.5
Accessories – 3.5
Value – 3.5
Customer Experience – 4.5
Customer Reviews – 4.7

Vs. The Average

While it’s much cheaper than your average cable machine, the MAXPRO Smart Connect Cable Machine is still a pricier machine at nearly $750. Its compact footprint and above-average resistance may make the price worth it for some, though.

MAXPRO Smart Connect Cable MachineAverage Cable Machine
Price$749$2,265
Type of machinePortable cable trainerVaries by profile
Footprint32.3” L” x 3.6” W x 4.11” H (unfolded)25.6” L x 31.8” W x 49.4” H
Resistance typeDigitalWeight stack
Max resistance300 lbs275 lbs
Pulley materialN/ANylon
Cable ratioN/A2:1
Warranty2 yearsMulti-year (2 or more)

Read our full MaxPro Smart Connect Cable Machine review to learn more. 

Other Cable Machines We Researched and Tested

We’ve only been able to try out some of these home gym cable machines, but they just didn’t beat out our top picks.

  • Bodysolid Powerline Cable Crossover Machine PCCO90X: This cable crossover station is highly recommended by many, but nobody on our team has been able to try it out yet.
  • Titan Plate Loaded Lat Pulldown: This is a great machine that uses standard Olympic plates to provide the resistance, and it comes with a low row handle and lat pulldown bar. But other than that, you can’t do much with this machine, though it is great for heavy lifters looking for a challenge.
  • Inspire Fitness FTX: The FTX is a smaller version of the Inspire Fitness FT2 Functional Trainer, but it’s still built with the same construction and quality. That said, the max pulley height may not allow for taller users to get a full range of motion on some movements.
  • Vitruvian Trainer+: This smart cable machine is compact and great for small spaces. Despite its smaller stature, it can also add magnetic resistance of up to 440 pounds. Still, as discussed in our Vitruvian Trainer+ review, it’s one of the pricier options out there at nearly $3,000.
  • OYO NOVA Gym: This is a tiny functional trainer that can provide up to 40 pounds of resistance and perform 200 exercises. The technology behind it is inspired by the way NASA astronauts train in space, but our reviewer, Amanda Capritto, CPT, CES, CNC, CF-L1, CSNC, says it lacks durability and is more geared toward beginners due to its low level of resistance.
A person in a purple shirt and black shorts performs a cable tricep pushdown exercise in a gym. Nearby are weights, a treadmill, medicine balls, and wall pads. The walls are gray with a pattern.
The right cable machine can be the centerpiece of any home gym.

How We Picked and Tested the Best Cable Machines for Home Gyms

Besides workout experience and price, we looked at a variety of factors when constructing our best cable machines list.

Weight Stacks 

We wanted to make sure the cable machines we recommended were light enough for isolation exercises, but challenging enough for any compound movements you wish to do with them. Similarly, we looked at whether the weight capacity could work for people of all fitness levels. To earn a score of 3 out of 5, the cable machine should support at least 200-pound weight stacks at a 2:1 ratio (meaning the max resistance is 100 pounds).

Construction and Durability

Like most pieces of home gym equipment, we favor steel and metal equipment over a lot of plastic material. That said, plastic components make sense for some smaller, lightweight machines, so we also test the machines to see how durable they are in use, checking for early signs of wear and tear.

Scores of 4 or more were given to solidly-made machines with primarily steel construction, commercial-grade cables, and high-quality pulleys (typically aluminum).

Versatility  

A cable machine should perform a variety of exercises, allowing you to target upper body and lower body muscles. There are some, though, that only target one specific muscle group until you buy additional equipment, like a low pulley for lower body movements. Others double their functionality with a built-in squat rack or Smith machine.

Smoothness

Perhaps the most important facet of any cable machine is its pulley system and how smoothly it operates. We loaded machines as heavy as they can get to assess how they operate under tension. Top scores went to cable machines with aluminum pulleys with buttery-smooth travel.

Adjustments

For adjustments, I’m not only referring to changing the weight between sets, but also the number of height positions the machine has and if it can work for multiple users. Too low of a height can impact taller users, for example.

A person in a gray shirt using a cable machine in a gym. The gym has a dark ceiling with spotlights and shelves of dumbbells and blue kettlebells in the background.
Aluminum pulleys bring added durability to any cable machine.

Best Cable Machine Attachments

Some cable machines may only come with a standard handle, while others may come with every attachment you can think of. It’s nice to have a variety of different handle attachments if you can swing it, as one 2016 study1 suggests that different handles and grips can activate different muscles in the forearms, allowing for varied muscle activation while training.

If you’re looking for a cable attachment package that has options for multiple grips, we recommend the REP Fitness Pro Series Package. We love this series because it comes with five high-quality attachments capable of targeting most of your muscle groups. It’s also a great value at $280. 

Looking to buy à la carte? These are some extra attachments that can expand the range of exercises available to you; we’d recommend getting them with, or shortly after, buying your cable machine.

  • Triceps Rope: Despite its name, a triceps rope can be used for more than just your triceps pushdowns. It’s also capable of performing biceps, shoulder, back, and abs exercises. 
  • Lat Pulldown Bar: Not all cable machines can be used to do lat pulldowns, but for those that can, a lat pulldown is a necessary investment.  
  • Ankle Strap: This is simply a strap you attach to your ankle so you can perform moves like leg extensions with your cable machine.   
  • Double D-row Handle: Also known as a V-handle, these are great for seated rows, and can also be used with barbells and dumbbells to target different areas of the biceps and back. 
  • Multi-grip Curl Bar: Enhance your biceps curls with this attachment. A multi-grip curl bar allows you to target different areas of your chest, triceps, and biceps all with one handle. 

Benefits of Cable Machines

“Beginners can often avoid cable machines, because it’s intimidating,” says Amanda Capritto, CPT, CES, CNC, CF-L1. She adds that, on the contrary, “They’re very simple to use, and everyone can benefit from their use—beginning or advanced lifters.” 

Because cable machines come in all shapes and sizes, we’re instead going to concentrate on the benefits of using cables. And unlike your television habits, there’s a lot of reasons why you should never cut the cord. 

Faster Muscle Fatigue 

Unlike free weights or even resistance bands, cables work your muscles at all times during the lift providing consistent tension during all portions of the exercise. This means your muscles will remain under tension for longer, although the muscles used are typically more isolated than the muscles recruited for free weight exercises, according to a 2023 meta-analysis2.

Another study3 showed that a slow leg press—descending 6 seconds during the eccentric portion of the movement—resulted in greater protein synthesis up to 24 hours after the workout, implying that the greater time under tension provided by cable machines could have a similar benefit.

Safer Exercise

Dexter Jackson, one of the greatest bodybuilders of all time, has credited cable machines as part of the reason why he was able to compete past 50 years of age. Cables don’t put as much stress on your joints and stabilizer muscles, and while nothing in life is risk-free, it’s much harder to hurt yourself with them than with a barbell or dumbbell.

Of note, however, a study from 20104 examining weight-training injuries found that while the majority of reported injuries involved free weights, the most common mechanism was weights dropping on a person rather than injuries caused by the free-weight exercise itself. That said, cable machines may be safer for beginners due to their increased stability and ease of use compared to dumbbells, which require more coordination and carry a higher risk of improper technique or injury.

Versatile Equipment

We’ve talked about the fact that cable machines can hit all muscle groups, but you can also hit those areas from angles that are more difficult to reach using free weights. “Free weight resistance provides a force vector straight down toward the ground,” personal trainer and strength and sports doctor Mike Masi says. “If you want a different angle to hit a different body part, you’ll have to manipulate your body around that force vector. But with a cable machine you can just slide the handle higher or lower to get the desired effect.”

He adds, “All in all, cable machines are not necessary but provide more flexibility and variety that can keep your gym routine from getting stale.”

person-doing-cable-triceps-kickback-on-machine
Picking the right cable machine attachments can add some versatility to your workouts.

What to Look for in a Cable Machine

Ready to find the best cable machine for your home gym and fitness goals? Here are a few things to keep in mind.

Footprint 

A cable machine is probably going to be one of the largest purchases you make for your home gym in terms of space, next to a power rack. “Some cable machine options can be big and bulky,” adds Amanda Capritto, certified personal trainer, “but there are plenty of compact solutions, too, that take up less space than free weights.”

You can certainly get a good cable machine that won’t take up much space, but if you’re looking for the best of the best you’ll want to make sure you have a good amount of space to dedicate to it.

A good guide would be to have at least 7 feet of vertical space and 6 feet of horizontal space dedicated to your cable machine. This will ensure you can get enough range of motion during each exercise, even with a small portable cable trainer. There are some space-saving ones that are mountable, or come with just one weight stack. 

Adjustments 

One of the benefits of cable machines is the multiple pulley positions that allow you to get a full-body workout with just one piece of equipment. But some machines have more adjustment positions than others, either due to their size or construction.

Although not technically an adjustment, you’ll also want to try to get a pulley machine that can swivel so you can engage more muscle groups in different lifts. 

Weight Stack vs. Plate-Loaded

The debate between weight stack and plate-loaded cable machines isn’t going away anytime soon, so it’s important to understand the benefits of each.

Weight stack models come with the weights built into the machine; all you have to do is adjust the total with a pin, and you’re good to go. This is typically what you’ll see at most commercial gyms. Plate-loaded machines, on the other hand, require you to manually load traditional weight plates to your desired total. 

That’s the high-level difference between the two types, but there’s a lot more to it than that. First, plate-loaded models tend to be less expensive, since you’re responsible for buying your own weights. This is a solid option for budget-minded folks who already have some plates lying around. The downside is that you’ll have to load and unload the weights every time you want to change the working total, making it a bit more time-consuming and less ideal for dropsets or quick circuit training. 

It’s also important to note that plate-loaded machines tend to have higher weight capacities and allow for more exact totals, provided you have enough plates in different combinations. Weight stack machines go up in fixed increments and typically top out at around 250 pounds, unless the brand offers an upgradable expansion set. 

When it comes to ease of use, the win goes to weight stack cable machines. You can change loads in a second, and you won’t need to worry about needing extra storage space for a fleet of plates. You’ll pay more up front, but the convenience might be worthwhile for some.

Cable Handle Attachments 

Most cable machines will come with single handles, which you can do flyes and other moves with. Still, if you’re looking to increase the machine’s versatility, you might want to invest in a curl bar or triceps rope at the very least.

Some cable machines come with pegs to hang and store your attachments. If not, you’ll need to figure out another way to keep them secure when they’re not in use. 

RELATED: Best Home Gym Storage

Price Point 

This factor’s pretty self-explanatory, but we’ll also add that it might be worth spending a little more for a higher-quality machine rather than saving by buying a cheaper one—in terms of price and craftsmanship.

Some basic cable machines, like cable towers, may cost just a few hundred dollars, while huge commercial systems will be upward of thousands of dollars. Consider what you have available in your budget to figure out what price range works best for you.

Durability

We found that the average cable machine costs $2,265. For that type of investment, you’ll want to make sure the machine you’re buying is built with high-grade materials that can withstand the rigors of a strength-training program. 

To start, know that most cable pulleys are made of nylon. While this is fine more often than not, you might want to spring for a model with aluminum pulleys for some added durability. From there, make sure the product is made of heavy-duty steel—think 11-gauge over 14-gauge. 

Additionally, while some plastic parts are inevitable, it is best to keep these components to a minimum on your cable machine of choice. Plastic won’t be as sturdy as steel or aluminum, and could be more likely to fail after excessive use.

Versatility 

Cable machines offer a wide range of exercise options, but not all models deliver the same level of functionality. If you want your machine to serve as the centerpiece of your home gym, choose one that offers the most bang for your buck. 

Look for machines with fully adjustable pulleys that go beyond just high and low positions. More height options can help you attack muscles from different angles, as well, which can be especially useful for anyone primarily performing bodybuilding workouts

You’ll also want to check out which attachments the company offers and how those can help you meet your fitness goals. Though most brands will have a wealth of attachments for upper body exercises, pay close attention to those that offer lower-body add-ons, too, as this can vastly expand your training options. Some go a step further by incorporating a Smith machine into their setup, offering even more workout versatility. 

The right cable machine should accommodate most, if not all, of your strength training needs and wants. You just need to do a little research beforehand to avoid getting shortchanged by the wrong model.

Best Cable Machine for Home Gym: FAQs

What are the best cable machines?

With compact solutions and DIY machines to large functional trainers and rack attachments, the best cable machine will vary from person to person and depend on your fitness goals, budget, and home gym space.

That said, we recommend the REP Ares 2.0 cable attachment for most people—especially if you already have a REP PR-4000 power rack. For a more compact solution, you may want to check out the Beyond Power Voltra I, and for a budget rack-and-cable combo, check out Giant Lifting’s Garage Gym Power Rack 2.0 with a lat pulldown and low row attachment.

Are cable machine workouts effective?

Yes, cable machines can be just as effective as free weight exercises. When it comes to muscle adaptations from resistance training, studies2 repeatedly show that there’s little to no difference in muscle growth and hypertrophy between free weight and machine-based exercise. Cable machines do allow for consistent resistance and therefore more time under tension, which has been shown3 to have a positive outcome in muscle protein synthesis, resulting in muscle-building.

Is a 1:1 or a 2:1 pulley ratio better?

Both pulley ratios have pros and cons. A 1:1 pulley ratio means the weight on the cable is the weight you’ll feel—100 pounds feels like 100 pounds. However, the cable length won’t be able to travel as far in this setup, limiting the ability to do longer exercises, like cable crossovers.

A 2:1 ratio, on the other hand, will have twice the cable length and allow for more movements, but the felt weight on the cables will be half of the actual resistance (100 pounds will feel like 50 pounds). Most cable machines go with a 2:1 cable ratio as it balances both decent weights and solid cable length, but you’ll need to determine which ratio is best for your fitness goals.

References

  1. Rendos, N. K., Heredia Vargas, H. M., Alipio, T. C., Regis, R. C., Romero, M. A., & Signorile, J. F. (2016). Differences in Muscle Activity During Cable Resistance Training Are Influenced by Variations in Handle Types. Journal of strength and conditioning research, 30(7), 2001–2009. https://doi.org/10.1519/JSC.0000000000001293
  2. Haugen, M. E., Vårvik, F. T., Larsen, S., Haugen, A. S., van den Tillaar, R., & Bjørnsen, T. (2023). Effect of free-weight vs. machine-based strength training on maximal strength, hypertrophy and jump performance – a systematic review and meta-analysis. BMC sports science, medicine & rehabilitation, 15(1), 103. https://doi.org/10.1186/s13102-023-00713-4
  3. Burd, N. A., Andrews, R. J., West, D. W., Little, J. P., Cochran, A. J., Hector, A. J., Cashaback, J. G., Gibala, M. J., Potvin, J. R., Baker, S. K., & Phillips, S. M. (2012). Muscle time under tension during resistance exercise stimulates differential muscle protein sub-fractional synthetic responses in men. The Journal of Physiology, 590(2), 351–362. https://doi.org/10.1113/jphysiol.2011.221200
  4. Kerr, Z. Y., Collins, C. L., & Comstock, R. D. (2010). Epidemiology of weight training-related injuries presenting to United States emergency departments, 1990 to 2007. The American journal of sports medicine, 38(4), 765–771. https://doi.org/10.1177/0363546509351560
]]>